365
NATIONAL AND HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA (ND & HND) IN MASS COMMUNICATION CURRICULUM AND COURSE SPECIFICATIONS November, 2014

NATIONAL AND HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA (ND & HND) IN …net.nbte.gov.ng/sites/default/files/2018-02/ND & HND Mass... · 2018-02-21 · NATIONAL AND HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA (ND & HND)

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    16

  • Download
    1

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

NATIONAL AND HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA (ND & HND)

IN

MASS COMMUNICATION

CURRICULUM AND COURSE SPECIFICATIONS

November, 2014

2

NATIONAL DIPLOMA (ND) IN MASS COMMUNICATION

3

GENERAL INFORMATION

1.0 GOAL AND OBJECTIVES

PROGRAMME GOAL:

The National Diploma (ND) in Mass Communication is meant to give the students technological education and professional skills

necessary for employment and job creation in various areas of mass communication industry, such as newspapers, magazines, radio,

television, film/video, new media, public relations, advertising, news agency, government and corporate information services.

PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES

On completion of this course, the diplomats will be able to carry out the following functions:

a) Gather, investigate and report news for the print, broadcast and online media

b) elect, edit and prepare for publication, news items, features, photographic graphics and multimedia materials and results of

investigations for print and

c) Produce, present and direct programmes for the electronic media

d) Produce, present, and direct programmes

e) Plan, prepare and produce materials for public relations and advertising purposes.

f) Know various outlets/contacts for commercial utilization of feature and magazine articles

g) Identify outlets for publishing of features and magazine articles.

h) Know how to negotiate terms for publishing articles.

i) Understand rights of the article author.

4

MINIMUM ENTRY REQUIREMENTS

The academic requirements for admission into the programme are:

Five (5) G.C.E. (0 level) , WASC,NECO or NABTEB subjects passed at not more than two sittings. The subjects must be passed at Credit

level and should include English Language, Literature in English, and any two others Mathematics is also required.

PROJECT

Every ND student is required to complete successfully on original practical project in any area of Mass Communication during his/her

final year on the programme in order to qualify for the award of the diploma.

2.1 CURRICULUM

The curriculum consists of four main components. These are:

i. General Studies

ii. Foundation Courses

iii. Professional Courses

iv. Supervised Industrial Work Experience Scheme (SIWES)

The General Studies component shall include courses in:- Arts and Humanities: English Language, indigenous language and foreign

language History.

Social Sciences; Citizenship (the Nigerian constitution), Political Science, Sociology, Philosophy and Geography Citizenship, Education

and Entrepreneurship, are compulsory.

2.3 The general Studies component shall account for not more than 10-15% of total contact hours for the programme.

2.4 Foundation courses include courses in English, Languages, Basic Computer Applications. The number of hours will account for about 10-

15% of the total contact hours.

2.5 Professional Courses are the core Mass communication Courses which give the student the theory and practical skills needed to practice in

Mass Communication. These may account for between 60-70% of the contact hours.

2.6 Students Industrial Work Experience Scheme(SIWES) shall be taken during the long vacation following the end of the second semester of

the first year.

3.0 CURRICULUM STRUCTURE

3.1 ND PROGRAMME

The structure of the ND programme consists of four semesters of classroom, Laboratory and Studio activities in the institution and a

semester (3 – 4 months) of Supervised Industrial Work Experience Scheme (SIWES), Each semester shall be of 17 weeks duration made

5

up as follows: 15 contact weeks of teaching, i.e. Lecture, Recitation and Practical Exercise tests, quizzes, etc and 2 weeks for examination

and registration. SIWES shall take place at the end of the second semester of the first year.

4.0 ACCREDITATION

The National Diploma (ND) in Mass Communication shall be accredited by NBTE before the diplomates can be awarded the diploma

certificate. Details about the process of accrediting a programme for the award of the ND are available from the Executive Secretary,

Programme Department, NBTE Plot „B‟, Bida Road, P.M.B. 2239, Kaduna, Nigeria.

5.0 CONDITIONS FOR THE AWARD OF THE DIPLOMA

Institutions offering accredited programmes should award the National Diploma/ Higher National Diploma to candidates who have

successfully completed the programme after passing prescribed course work, examinations, diploma project and the supervised industrial

work experience. Such candidates should have completed a minimum of between 72 and 80 semester credit units.

The Diplomas shall be classified as follows:

Distinction - GPA of 3.50 and above

Upper Credit – GPA of 3.00 – 3.49

Lower Credit – GPA of 2.50 – 2.99

Pass - GPA of 2.00 – 2.49

Fail - GPA of below 2.00

6.0 GUIDANCE NOTES FOR TEACHERS TEACHING THE PROGRAMME

6.1 The new curriculum is drawn in course units. This is in keeping with the provisions of the National Policy on Education which stresses

the introduction of the semester credit units, which will enable a student who so wishes to transfer the units already completed in an

institution to another of similar standard .

6.2 In designing the unit, the principle of the modular system by product has been adopted thus making each of the professional modules,

when completed, provide the student with technical operative skills, which can be used for job creation and employment purposes.

6.3 As the success of the credit unit system depends on the articulation of programmes between the institutions and industry, the curriculum

Content has been written in behavioral objectives, so that the expected performance of the student who successfully completed the courses

of the programme is clear to it. There is a slight departure in the presentation of the performance based curriculum which requires the

conditions under which the performances are expected to be carried out and the criteria for the acceptable levels of performance to be

stated. It is a deliberate attempt to get the staff of the department teaching the programme to write their own curriculum stating the

conditions existing in their institution under which the performance can take place and to follow that with the criteria for determining an

acceptable level of performance. The Academic Board of the institution may vet departmental submission on the final curriculum. The

6

aim is to continue to see to it that a solid internal evaluation system exists in each institution for ensuring minimum standards and quality

of education in the programmes offered throughout the polytechnic system.

6.4 The teaching of the theory and practical work should, as much as possible, be integrated. Practical exercises, especially those in

professional courses and studio work should not be taught in isolation from the theory. For each course, there should be a balance of

theory to practice in the ratio of 50:50 or 60:40 or the reverse.

7.0 GUIDELINES ON SIWES PROGRAMME

7.1 For the smooth operation of the SIWES the following guidelines shall apply.

a. Institution offering the ND programme shall arrange to place the students in industry. By April 30 of each year, six copies of the

master list showing where each student has been placed shall be submitted to the Executive Secretary, NBTE, who shall, in turn

authenticate the list and forward it to the Industrial Training Fund, Jos.

b. The Placement Officer should discuss and agree with industry on the following

i. A task inventory of what the student is expected to experience during the period of attachment. It may be wise to adopt the

one already approved for each field by the industry based supervisor.

ii. The evaluation of the student by the industry based supervisor and the institution-based supervisor.

The final grading of the student during the period of attachment should be weighted more on the evaluation by industry-based

supervisor.

7.2 Evaluation of Students during the SIWES

In the evaluation of the student, cognizance should be taken of the following items:

i. Punctuality

ii. Attendance

iii. General Attitude to Work

iv. Respect for authority

v. Interest in the field/technical area

vi. Technical competence as a potential technician in his field.

vii. Team work

7.3 Grading of SIWES

To ensure uniformity of grading scales, the institution should ensure that the uniform grading of students work which has been agreed to

by all polytechnics is adopted.

7.4 The Institution Based Supervisor

7

The institution-based supervisor should initial the log book during each visit. This will enable him to check and determine to what extent

the objectives of the scheme are being met and to assist students having any problems regarding the specific assignments given to them by

their industry-based supervisor.

7.5 Frequency of Visit

Institution should ensure that students placed on attachment are visited within one month of their placement. Other visits shall be arranged

so that:

1. there is another visit six weeks after the first visits; and

2. final visit in the last month of the attachment

7.6 Stipend for Students in SIWES

The rate of stipend payable shall be determined from time to time by the Federal Government after due consultation with the Federal

Ministry of Education, the Industrial Training Fund and the National Board for Technical Education (NBTE).

7.7 SIWES as a Component of the Curriculum

The completion of SIWES is important in the final determination of whether the student is successful in the programme or not. Failure in

the SIWES is an indication that the student has not shown sufficient interest in the field or has no potential to become a skilled technician

in field. The SIWES should be graded on a fail or pass basis. Where a student has satisfied all other requirements but failed SIWES he

may only be allowed to repeat another four months SIWES at his/her own expense.

National Board for Technical Education

Kaduna. 6th June, 2014

8

ND MASS COMMUNICATION: CURRICULUM TABLES

viii. 1

ST SEMESTER ND1

COURSE

CODE

COURSE TITLE L T P C

U

CH

GNS 111 CITIZENSHIP EDUCATION 2 - - 2 2

GNS 101 USE OF ENGLISH 2 - - 2 2

MAC 111 ENGLISH FOR MASS

COMMUNICATION I

2 - - 2 2

MAC 112 FOREIGN LANGUAGE 2 - - 2 2

MAC 113 BASIC COMPUTER

APPLICATION FOR MASS

MEDIA 1

2 - 1 3 3

MAC 114 INTRODUCTION TO MASS

COMMUNICATION

3 - - 3 3

MAC 115 INTRODUCTION TO NEWS

REPORTING &

WRITING

2 - 2 3 3

MAC 116 INDIGENOUS LANGUAGE 2 - - 2 2

MAC 117 INTRODUCTION TO

BROADCASTING

2 - - 2 2

MKT 111 FUNDAMENTALS OF

MARKETING

2 - - 2 2

TOTAL 21 - 3 23 23

9

2ND

SEMESTER ND1

COURSE

CODE

COURSE TITLE L T P CU CH

GNS 102 COMMUNICATION IN

ENGLISH I

2 - - 2 2

GNS 121 CITIZENSHIP EDUCATION 2 - - 2 2

MAC 121 ENGLISH FOR MASS

MEDIA 11

2 - - 2 2

MAC 122 FOREIGN LANGUAGE 2 - - 2 2

MAC 123 BASIC COMPUTER

APPLICATION FOR MASS

MEDIA 11

1 - 2 3 3

MAC 124 COMPUTER GRAPHICS

FOR MASS MEDIA

2 - 1 3 3

MAC 125 INTERMEDIATE NEWS

WRITING & REPORTING

2 - 1 3 3

MAC 126 PRINCIPLES OF PUBLIC

RELATIONS

2 - - 2 2

MAC 127 PRINCIPLES OF

ADVERTISING

2 - - 3 3

EED 128 INTRODUCTION TO

ENTRPRENEURSHIP

2 - - 2 2

TOTAL 19 - 4 24 24

10

1st SEMESTER ND11

COURSE

CODE

COURSE TITLE L T P CU CH

GNS 201 USE OF ENGLISH I 2 - - 2 2

GNS 211 INTRODUCTION TO

SOCIOLOGY/

PSYCHOLOGY

2 - - 2 2

MAC 211 ENGLISH FOR MASS

MEDIA 111

2 - - 2 2

MAC 212 INTRODUCTION TO

RESEARCH METHODS

2 - - 2 2

MAC 213 COPY EDITING 1 - 2 3 3

MAC 214 FEATURE WRITING 1 - 2 3 3

MAC 215 MASS MEDIA & SOCIETY

2 - - 2

MAC 216 MASS COMMUNICATION

ETHICS

2 - - 2 2

MAC 217 BROADCAST

PRODUCTION 1

2 - 1 2 2

EED 218 PRACTICE OF

ENTRPRENEURSHIP

3 - - 3 3

MAC 100 SIWES - - 2 2 -

TOTAL 19 7 23 23

11

2nd

SEMESTER ND11

COURSE

CODE

COURSE TITLE L T P CU CH

GNS 202 COMMUNICATION IN

ENGLISH I1

2 - - 2 2

GNS 222 ECONOMICS 2 - - 2 2

GNS 225 GEOGRAPHY OF NIGERIA 2 - - 2 2

MAC 222 SPEECH

COMMUNICATION

1 - 1 2 2

MAC 223 NEWSPAPER AND

MAGAZINE PRODUCTION

2 - 1 3 3

MAC 224 PHOTOGRAPHING AND

PHOTO JOURNALISM

2 - 1 3 3

MAC 225 BROADCAST

PRODUCTION 11

2 - 1 3 3

MAC 226 MASS COMMUNICATION

LAWS

2 - - 2 2

MAC 227 INVESTIGATIVE &

INTERPRETATIVE

REPORTING

2 - 1 3 3

MAC 228 MASS MEDIA,

DEMOCRACY AND

GOVERNANCE

2 - 2 2

MAC 229 PRACTICAL PROJECT - 2 2 -

TOTAL 19 - 7 26 24

12

Course: ENGLISH FOR MASS

MEDIA I

Course Code: MAC 111 Contact Hours/Credit unit: 2/2

Semester: 1st Theoretical: hours/week 1

Year: ND 1 Pre-requisite: - N/A Practical: hours /week 1

GOAL: This course is designed to expose students to the fundamentals of Mass Communication with emphasis on the

concept, structure and process of Mass Communication

1.0 Know the structures that make up sentences and understand how these structures are correctly linked

2.0 Know the punctuation marks and their uses

3.0 Appreciate Mass communication as a social force

4.0 Know how to write good and well - ordered paragraphs.

5.0 Understand note taking and recording skill.

13

General Objective 1.0: Know the structures that make up sentences and understand how these structures are correctly linked

THEORETICAL CONTENTS PRACTICAL CONTENTS

Week/

s

Specific Learning Outcomes

Teacher‟s activities Specific Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’s

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/

practical

Evaluation

1- 3 Sentence Structure

1.1 Breakdown sentences into

subject and predicate

1.2 Identify nouns

1.3 List the properties of nouns

1.4 Identify verbs.

1.5 List the usages of verbs.

1.6 List the characteristics of a

sentence.

1.7 Identify phrases in sentences

1.8 Identify main and subordinate

clauses

1.9 Identify different types of

pronouns

-Guide students to

construct sentence

structure with

lexicons relevant to

the Mass media,

-List properties of

nouns,

-Identify verbs,

-List the usages of

verbs.

-List the

characteristics of a

sentence.

Identify phrases in.

-Explain main and

Practical not

required

Practical

not

required

Notebooks

Textbooks

Internet

Define

nouns and

verbs,

-List the

usages of the

two

List

properties of

each.

-List the

characteristic

s of a

sentence.

14

1.10 Identify adjectives and

their types

1.11 Identify adverbs and their

types.

subordinate clauses

-List different types

of pronouns

-Define adjectives,

adverbs and list their

types.

General Objectives: 2.0 Know the punctuation marks and their uses

4-6 Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher’s activities Specific Learning

Outcomes

Teacher‟s

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/

practical

Evaluation

Punctuation

2.1 Use commas correctly

2.2 List the uses of the colon

2.3 Enumerate the uses of the

semi-colon.

2.4 Name the uses of the dash

i. Explain the use of

comma.

ii. Explain how to

use colon.

iii. Differentiate

between colon

and comma and

how to use

brackets

correctly.

-Explain these terms

and their uses:

apostrophe,

Books,

magazines,

Radio

recorder

Books,

magazines,

Radio

recorder

Differentiate

between

colon and

comma and

state when

they are use

Explain the

following

terms:

Apostrophe

15

2.5 Use brackets correctly

2.6 List the uses of the full stop

2.7 State the uses of quotation

marks

2.8 Enumerate the uses of the

question mark

2.9 Use the exclamation mark

correctly

2.10 Punctuate a given passage.

quotation mark,

colon and semi-

colon,

dash and hyphen

brackets,

full stop,

quotation marks and

Exclamation mark.

-Punctuate a given

passage.

and

quotation

mark.

colon and

semi-colon

dash and

hyphen

brackets ,

full stop,

quotation

marks,

question and

exclamation

marks.

-Punctuate a

given

passage.

General Objectives: 3.0 Know how to write good and well-ordered paragraphs

Week

7-9

Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher’s activities Specific Learning

Outcomes

Teacher‟s

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/

practical)

Evaluation

16

Paragraphing

3.1 Define a paragraph

3.2 List the qualities of a good

paragraph.

3.3 Identify the topic sentence in

a paragraph

3.4 Re-write a group of jumbled

sentences into a well-ordered

paragraph.

3.5 State the methods of

developing a topic sentence

into a paragraph.

3.6 State purposes of an

introductory paragraph.

3.7 List the uses of a concluding

paragraph.

-Define a paragraph

-Guide students to

List the qualities of a

good paragraph.

Enumerate the topic

sentence in a

paragraph

Guide students to

Re-write a group of

jumbled sentences

into a well-ordered

Explain methods of

developing topic

sentence into a

paragraph.

Explain purposes of

an introductory

paragraph.

List the uses of a

Books

Newspaper

dailies

Old TV

scripts

Magazine and

radio scripts

Agency

bulletin

What is

paragraphing

, why do we

need

paragraph in

a sentence?

List the

qualities of a

good

paragraph

Re-write a

group of

jumbled

sentences

Why do we

make a topic

sentence into

a paragraph?

What are the

uses of a

concluding

paragraph

and

17

3.8 State the uses of quotations in

a paragraph.

3.9 Write two or more

paragraphs using a given

topic sentence.

.

concluding

paragraph and

Quotations in a

paragraph.

quotations in

a paragraph?

.

General Objectives: 4.0 Understand listening and recording skills

Week Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher’s activities Specific Learning

Outcomes

Teacher‟s

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/

practical)

Evaluation

10-12 5.1 Explain reading

5.2 List different types of reading

e.g. skimming, flipping,

intensive

5.3 practice reading for

comprehension.

5.4 Listening Skills

5.5 List the different types of

Make students listen

to radio/TV

programmes

speeches.

Ask questions after

the listening

recorders exercise

Various

relevant

textbooks

Poem, short

stories etc.

Radio

TV

Questions

should be

asked based

on the

passages of

the recording

exercises.

.

18

listening

5.6 Distinguish between reading

and listening.

5.7 List listening skills

Recorders

General Objectives: 5.0 Understand note taking and Recording skills

Week

13- 14

Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher’s activities Resources Specific

Learning

Outcomes

Teacher‟s

activities

Evaluation

5.1 Learn how to take proper notes during

lectures.

5.2 Create note taking skills.

5.3 Learn how to record and transcribe

i. Explain the

right way of

listening and

taking notes

ii. Engage

students in

note taking

exercises.

iii. Present

speeches

record and

transcribe key

points in an

address.

Writing

materials

Reporters

Tape recorders

Play back

systems

Writing

materials

Reporters

Tape

recorders

Play back

systems

19

iv. Students to

read back

notes taken

Department/Programme: MASS COMMUNICATION (ND)

Course: Basic Computer Application for Mass

Media 1 (Word Processing )

Course Code: MAC 113 Credit hours: 2 hours/week

Year: ND I Semester I Theoretical: 1hour/week

Practical: 1 hour/ week

General Objectives:

On completion of this course the student should be able to:

1.0 Know the basic concepts of computer

2.0 Understand the function of computer hardware software components

3.0 Know different types of softwares commonly used in mass media and the tasks to which each type of software is used.

4.0 Understand the basic use of word processing applications

5.0 Know how to enhance Document using Word processing application

20

Theoretical content Practical Content

Week Specific

Learning

outcomes

Teacher‟s

activities

Specific

Learning

Outcomes

Teacher‟s

activities

Resources

General Objective 1: Know the basic concept of computers

1-2 1.0: Examine

types of

computers and

how they

process

information

Compare

categories of

computers based

on their size,

power and

purpose

Identify the role

of the CPU

including

speed and how

it is measured

Explain the

difference

between

memory

and storage

See the

anatomy of a

computer

system

Identify input,

output and

storage devices

Classify

computers

based on

size,

purpose

and

operation

Illustrate

anatomy of

computers

Illustrate

block

diagram of

CPU

Books,

Diagrams/charts

Internet

21

General Objective 2.0: Understand the function of computer hardware and software components

3-4 2.1 Discuss

how hardware

and

software work

together to

perform

computing

tasks

Identify the

location of the

motherboard with

the CPU,

memory, power

supply, expansion

clots, ports, and

drives

General Objective 3.0: Know different types of softwares commonly used in mass media and the tasks to which each type of software

is used.

5-7 3.1 Explain

general

concepts

related to

software

categories,

and the tasks to

which each

type of

software is

used

List different types

of software used for

various computing

tasks

Identify

fundamental

concepts and

common uses

relating to word

processing,

spreadsheets,

Identify

different

softwares

commonly

used in mass

media

operations and

the tasks for

which each is

applied in

production of

mass media

Illustrate different

types of softwares

specific to mass

media tasks and

their uses

Books,

Diagrams/charts

Internet, Computer

(with Word

processing

application

installed)

22

3.2 Identify the

specific

applications of

each of these

softwares in

mass media

3.3 Practices

such as

newspaper,

magazine,

radio, TV,

internet,

advertising etc

databases, graphics

and

multimedia, and

presentation

software

Discuss the

application of each

software in mass

media practices

such as newspaper,

magazine, radio,

TV, internet,

advertising etc

contents.

General Objective: 4.0 Understand the basic use of word processing applications

8-11 4.1 Discuss

common on

screen

elements of

Word

Processing

applications

operating

Identify common

on screen

elements of Word

Processing

applications

Demonstrate

typical uses

of the various

document

editing tools

available in a

Word

processing

Practice the use of

basic tools for

enhancing document

in Word processing

application

Format text and

documents using the

Books, Diagrams/charts

Internet, Computer

(with Word processing

application installed)

23

system

4.1Explain the

various

document

editing tools

available in a

typical word

processing

application

4.2 Explain the

methods of

Formatting

Text and

Paragraphing

in a Word

Processing

application

Discuss various

editing tools

available in a

typical word

processing

application

application automatic formatting

tools

24

General Objective 5.0: Know how to enhance Document using Word processing application

11-

13

5.1Explain

tools used in a

typical Word

processing

application for

enhancing

Document

5.2 Discuss

how to create

Columns,

Tables and

Other Features

in Table Tools

5.3Explain

various

graphics tools

available in

Word

processing

application and

relevant to

various tasks in

mass media

Identify on-screen

formatting

information

(select text,

line/paragraph

spacing, indent,

create and modify,

bulleted/numbered

list, symbols,

special characters,

outline,

including breaks,

paragraph markers,

date/time,

document

comments, ruler,

tabs, page break,

section break, page

numbers,

headers/footers,

footnotes/endnotes,

borders, shading,

styles, format

Demonstrate

the

application of

various tools

used in Word

processing

application

for enhancing

document

Demonstrate

how to create

tables, rows,

columns and

other features

in using the

Table Tools

in a Word

processing

application

Illustrate application

of tools for used for

enhancing

documents

Books, Diagrams/charts

Internet, Computer

(with Word processing

application installed)

25

practice. painter,

track changes,

document statistics)

Department/ Programme: MASS

COMMUNICATION ND 1

Course Code:

MAC 114

Contact Hours/credit units: 3/3

Subject/Course: INTRODUCTION

TO MASS COMMUNICATION

DURATION: 3

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE:

1ST

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours/week

3

Year: 1 Semester: 1st Pre-requisite: - Practical: hours /week

GOAL: This course is designed to expose students to the fundamentals of Mass Communication with emphasis on the

concept, structure and process of Mass Communication

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

1.0Understand Mass Communication in its general and specific terms

2.0 Understand different media of mass communication.

3.0 Appreciate Mass communication as a social force

4.0 Evaluate the uses of each mass communication channel

26

COURSE: INTRODUCTION

TO MASS COMMUNICATION

Course Code: MAC 114 Contact Hours/credit

hours: 3/3

Course Specification: Theoretical: hours/week

Year: ND 1 Semester: Pre-requisite: - FIRST Practical: hours /week

Theoretical Content Practical Content

General Objective 1.0: Understand Mass Communication in its general and specific terms

Week/s Specific Learning

Objectives Teacher’s

activities

Specific

Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’s

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/

practical

Evaluation

1

Basic Mass

Communication

1.1 Define Mass

Communication

1.2 Differentiate between

Mass Communication,

intra and Interpersonal

communication, Inter-

cultural

communication,

traditional

communication,

International

communication, public

Explain

differences

between Mass

Communication,

intra and

Interpersonal

communication,

Inter-cultural

communication,

traditional

communication,

International

communication,

public

Books

Journals

Internet

Differentiates

between

Mass

Communicati

on, intra and

Interpersonal

communicati

on

27

communication etc.

1.3 Explain the

communication

process, ie source,

encoder, transmitter,

decoder, receiver,

feedback, etc.

1.4 State the importance of

each stage of the

communication

process.

1.5 State various

communication models

1.6 Explain the basic

functions of Mass

Communication such as

information, education,

entertainment, persuasion,

mobilization, integration

etc

communication

etc.

Explain the

communication

process, ie source,

encoder,

transmitter,

decoder, receiver,

feedback, etc.

Importance of

each stage of the

communication

process.

List various

communication

models

Explain the basic

functions of Mass

Communication

such as

information,

education,

entertainment,

persuasion,

mobilization,

integration etc

Various

relevant

textbooks

Poem, short

stories etc.

Radio

TV

Recorders

What are the

sources of

communicati

on process?

What is the

importance of

each stage of

the

communicati

on?.

list process of

various

communicati

on models

What are the

basic

functions of

28

Mass

Communicati

on?

General Objective 2.0: Understand different media of mass communication. Conduct visits to relevant facilities

3

Characteristics of the

media

2.1 Distinguish between

the various types of

mass communication

media.

2.2 Identify the

characteristics,

weakness and strength

of each media.

Explain the

Characteristics of

the media

-Distinguish

between the

various types of

mass

communication

media.

Explain the

characteristics,

weakness and

strength of each

media

Books

Journals

Internet

encoder,

transmitt

er,

decoder,

receiver,

TV,

Radio

etc

What are the

Characteristics of

the media?

Distinguish

between the

various types of

mass

communication

media.

What arethe

characteristics,

weakness and

strength of each

media

General Objective 3.0: Appreciate Mass Communication as a social force

29

7

Mass Communication As

Social Force

3.1 Identify Mass Communication

as a social institution.

3.2 Analyse the mass media as a

development resource.

3.3 Apply the mass media as a

socio-cultural facilitator.

Exemplify why is seen

Mass Communication

is seen as a social

institution.

Analyze the mass

media as a

development resource

and as a socio-cultural

facilitator.

Practical not

required

Mass

Communicat

ion is seen as

a social

institution,

Mass media

as a

development

resource.

And as a

socio-

cultural

facilitator

General Objective 4.0: Evaluate the uses of each Mass Communication channel

9

Mass Communication

Channels

4.1 Explain the influence of the

mass media on the society.

4.2 Evaluate the mass media as a

societal catalyst and

tranquilizer.

Explain the influence

of the mass media on

the society.

Evaluate the mass

media as a societal

catalyst and

tranquilizer.

Practical not

required

-Explain the

influence of

the mass

media on the

society.

-Mass media

as a societal

catalyst and

tranquilizer.

30

Department/ Programme: NATIONAL

DIPLOMA IN MASS

COMMUNICATION

Course Code:

MAC 115

Contact Hours/Credit unit:

3/3

Subject/Course: INTRODUCTION TO

NEWSREPORTING AND WRITING

DURATION: 4

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE:

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours/week

2

Year: ND1 Semester: 1st Pre-requisite: Practical:1 hours /week

GOAL: This course is designed to enable the students to acquire the theory and practice of news reporting, writing

and editing

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course the student should:

1.0 Appreciate journalism as a career

2.0 Understand news and news stories

3.0 Know the process of news gathering

4.0 Know how to write news leads

5.0 Know how to write complete news story

6.0 Appreciate the demands of different media

7.0 Know how to cultivate and develop news sources

8.0 Know the tools of news gathering

9.0 Explain tools of news gathering

10.0 Explain how to observe news and to conduct interview

31

Course: : INTRODUCTION

TO REPORTING AND

NEWSWRITING

Course Code: MAC 115 Contact

Hours/credit unit:

3/3

Course Specification: Theoretical: hours/week

Year: ND 2 Semester: Pre-requisite: - N/A Practical: hours /week

THEORETICAL CONTENT PRACTICAL CONTENT

General Objectives 1.0: Appreciate journalism as a career

Week Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Resource

s

(Theoreti

cal/Practi

cal)

Evaluation

1- 2 1.1 Identify who is a

journalist

1.2 Enumerate the

career

opportunities for

journalists

1.3 Explain the

qualifications/qua

lities for a

journalist.

1.4 Explain whether

journalism is a

-Assign

students to

beats around

the school.

-Evaluate

students‟

stories.

-Show

student

samples of

news stories.

- Broadcast

script of

news

stories.

Write news and

cover beats.

Conduct interviews

Read newspapers

Transcribe

recordings

Retrieve archival

materials for back

grounding.

Monitor news

Guide

students to

Write news

cover beats,

Conduct

interviews,

Read

newspapers,

Transcribe

recordings,

Retrieve

Newsroo

m

Newspap

ers/Maga

zines

Radio

sets

Maps

Satellite

TV (with

subscripti

on)

Digital

Assign students

to:

Write news

cover beats.

Conduct

interviews

Read

newspapers

Transcribe

recordings

Retrieve

archival

materials for

back grounding.

Monitor news.

32

craft or a

profession.

archival

materials for

back

grounding,

Monitor

news

Audio

Recorder

Computer

(with

relevant

software

e.g. Corel

Draw

Quark

press,

Photostat,

etc

Ask questions

based on the

above.

General Objectives: 2.0 Understand news and news stories

3-5 News and News

Stories

2.1 Identify the

reporters in the

newspaper

organization.

2.2 Distinguish

between news

channels and

news process.

2.3 State accurate

news

terminologies e.g.

beat, lead, scoop,

-Identify the

reporters in

the

newspaper

organization.

Distinguish

between news

channels and

news process.

State accurate

news

terminologies

e.g. beat,

lead, scoop,

Show the reporters

in the newspaper

organization.

show news channels

and news process.

Show accurate news

terminologies e.g.

beat, lead, scoop,

etc.

Practical not

required

Guide

students to

Identify the

reporters in

the

newspaper

organization.

Identify news

channels and

news

process.

Use accurate

news

terminologies

Newspap

er,

magazine

s ,

Radio

recorder

/player

Televisio

n, video

etc

Define the

following:

reporter,

channel and

news.

Differentiate

between news

and channels

What is news

and why do we

33

etc.

2.4 Explain the

nature of news

and news values

2.5 Explain the

importance of

news.

2.6 Give examples of

news analysis

2.7Enumerate some

measures of

objectivity

2.8Explain policies

and orientations

2.9Analyse slanting

etc.

Explain the

nature of

news and

news values

-Explain the

importance of

news.

-Give

examples of

news analysis

-Enumerate

some

measures of

objectivity

-Explain

policies and

orientations,

news and

news values,

Importance of

news.

-Give

examples of

news analysis

-Enumerate

Practical not

required

Practical not

required

e.g. beat,

lead, scoop,

etc.

Newspap

er,

magazine

s ,

Radio

recorder

/player

Televisio

n, video

etc

Newspap

er,

magazine

s ,

Radio

recorder

/player

Televisio

n, video

listen to news

What is news

and why do we

listen to news

34

some

measures of

objectivity

General Objectives: 3.0 Know the process of news gathering

6-8 News Writing

3.1 Identify types of

leads (using

newspapers and

magazines).

3.2 Write various leads.

-Explain

types of leads

(using

newspapers

and

magazines).

-Write

various leads

-See types of leads

(using newspapers

and magazines).

-Practice writing of

various leads

-Guide in

watching

types of leads

(using

newspapers

and

magazines).

-Make

students

write various

leads.

newspape

rs and

magazine

s

Explain types of

leads (using

newspapers and

magazines).

-Write two

various leads

General Objectives: 4.0 Know how to write news leads

9-11 News Story Writing

4.1 Identify news

formats.

4.2 Explain the

transition device.

4.3 Write a news

story.

4.4 Analyse to writes

and follow ups.

Explicate

news formats,

and transition

device.

-Write a news

story.

Analyse to

writes and

follow ups.

Visualize news

formats.

Visualize the

transition device.

Compose a news

story.

Examine and follow

ups.

Guide

students to

Visualize

news

formats.

Visualize the

transition

device.

Compose a

news story.

Examine and

follow ups.

Newspap

er,

magazine

s ,

Radio

recorder

/player

Televisio

n, video

List the types

news formats.

What do you

understand by

transition

device?

Write a news

story.

Analyse to

writes and

follow ups.

35

General Objectives: 5.0 Know how to write complete news story

12-

14 Media Demands

5.1Analyse writing

news for radio and

television with

emphasis on:

a) similarities

b) differences

c) specific

devices in

writing and

presentation.

Explain

process of

writing news

for radio and

television

with

emphasis on:

a)

similarities

b) differences

c) specific

devices in

writing and

presentation.

Rehearse writing

news for radio

and television

with emphasis on:

a)

similarities

b)

differences

c) specific

devices in

writing and

Presentation.

Guide

students to

rehearse

writing news

for radio and

television

with

emphasis on:

a) similarities

b)

differences

c) Specific

devices in

writing and

presentation.

Newspaper,

magazines ,

Radio

recorder

/player

Television,

video

-Write a

sample of

news for

radio and

television

with .

-Enumerate

the

similarities

b)

differences

c)

specific

devices in

writing

and

Presentation.

36

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS COMMUNICATUION

COURSE TITLE: INTRODUCTION TO BROADCASTING

COURSE CODE: MAC 117

DURATION: 3 HOURS/WEEKS

SCHEDULE: 2ND

SEMESTER

GOAL: The course is designed to introduce the students to basic functions of and activities involved in

radio and television broadcasting. It also exposes the students to the principles and practice of

radio and television broadcasting.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

1.0 Know the history or origin of radio/television broadcasting

2.0 Understand the functions of radio/television.

3.0 Know the major factors that affect the practice of radio/television as a profession

4.0 Understand different types of radio/television ownership and control

5.0 Know common radio/television terms

6.0 Understand the functions and uses of radio/television equipment

7.0 Know the different types of programmes in radio and television

8.0 Understand the role of National and international broadcasting organizations.

37

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS COMMUNICATION

COURSE: INTRODUCTION TO

BROADCASTING

COURSE CODE MAC 117 CONTACT

HOURS/CREDIT UNIT 2/

hrs/week 12

COURSE SPECIFICATION: THEORY Theoretical: hours/week

Year: ND Semester: Pre-requisite Practical: hours/week

WE

EK

GENERAL OBJECTIVE:1.0 Know the history or origin of radio/television broadcasting

THEORETICAL CONTENT PRACTICAL CONTENT

General Objectives 1.0: Know how to handle different types of news events

Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher

Activities

Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher

Activities

Resources Evaluation

1.1 Outline the major

landmarks in the

evolution of

radio/television in

the world

1.2 Outline the major

landmarks in the

evolution of

radio/television in

Nigeria.

-Explain

evolution of

broadcasting

-Explain the

studio structure

and set-up

-Discuss various

broadcast

equipment

-Explain

organogram of

different

radio/TV station

explain above

-Perform various

activities listed in

specific outcome.

Illustrate the

evolution of

broadcasting

-see the studio

structure and set-

up

-see various

broadcast

equipment

-illustrate

organogram of

different

radio/TV station

explain

-Guide and

supervise

students to

-demonstrate

the use of

various

equipment,

-Show

organogram of

different

radio/TV

stations.

Radio/TV

studios and

accompanyin

g equipment.

Ask question

based on

what

students are

exposed to

38

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

COURSE: INTRODUCTION TO

BROADCASTING

COURSE CODE MAC 117 Contact Hours/ Credit

Unit 4/ 2 Hrs/Week

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THRORY Theoretical: hours/week

Year: ND Semester: Pre-requisite: Practical: hours/week

Week GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 1.0 : Know the history or origin of radio/television broadcasting

THEORETICAL CONTENT PRACTICAL CONTENT

Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher

Activities

Resources(pr

actical/

Theoretical)

Evaluation

1-2 1.1 Outline the major

landmarks in the

evolution of

radio/television in

the world

1.2 Outline the major

landmarks in the

evolution of

radio/television in

Nigeria.

Explain

evolution of

broadcasting

Explain the

studio structure

and set-up

Discuss various

broadcast

equipment

Perform various

activities listed in

specific outcome.

Organize the

various equipment

that are in the

radio and

television studios.

Sketch the

organogram of a

typical radio/TV

station.

supervise

students in

the studio to

Demonstrate

the use of

various

equipment.

Sketch

organogram

of various

radio/TV

stations

Radio/TV

studios and

accompanying

equipment

Quizzes on

the

evolution

of the

radio/tv in

the world

and Nigeria

in

particular.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 2.0: Know common Radio/Television Terms

3-4 2.1 Define Radio Explain organ- Practical not Ask questions

39

Broadcasting terms.

2.2 Define television

terms

2.3 Identify the different

departments in a

typical Radio and Tv

station

2.4 Explain how to use

radio/television terms

correctly

ogram of

different

radio/TV station

Write out some

of the terms

Perform specific

activities listed in

the outcomes

required Guide

students to

define terms

correctly

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 3.0: Understand the functions of radio/television.

5-6 3.1 List the key functions

of radio/television

3.2 Explain the functions

of radio/television in

different societies.

3.3 Explain the different

depts. of a typical

radio and TV stations.

3.4 Identify the different

departments in

radio/TV stations

Discuss with

students

functions of

Radio/TV in

society

Discuss the

layout of

different

Radio/TV depts.

and broadcast

chain

Sketch the

functions of

Radio/TV in

society

Draw a

layout of

different

Radio/TV

depts. and

broadcast

chain

Guide students to

Sketch the

functions of

Radio/TV in

society

Draw a layout of

different Radio/TV

depts. and

broadcast chain

Interacti

ve board.

Radio/T

V

Draw a layout

of TV/Radio

station.

What are the

function of

Radio and TV

Broadcast

chain

40

3.5 Explain as in 3.3

3.6 Explain typical

broadcasting chain

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 4.0: Know the five major factors that affect the practice of radio/television as a profession

7-8 4.1 Identify the

administrative factors

affecting

radio/television

broadcasting.

4.2 Identify the technical

aspects affecting

radio/television

broadcasting

4.3 Identify the socio-

economic factors

influencing

radio/television

broadcasting

4.4 Explain the various

legal and regulatory

factors affecting radio/

television broadcasting

4.5 Explain the political

factors that affect

radio/television

broadcasting.

Explain and

discuss the

administrative

factors that may

affect broadcast

Mention

technical aspects

that affect

broadcasting

transmitter

capacity, bender

with poor

recording levels

etc.

Explain

licensing rights,

libel, obscene

words on air

Access

information

on the

internet on

factors

affecting

broadcast.

Guide students

to access

information in

papers and on

the internet

Interacti

ve

writing

Board

Internet

science

magazin

e and

newspa

pers

List factors

affecting

radio/televisio

n

Broadcasting.

41

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 5.0: Understand the four different types of radio/television ownership and control

9-10

5.1 Distinguish between

public and private or

commercial ownership

and control of radio

and television

5.2 Analysis the

Government

system of radio/televi

sion ownership,

structure

and control.

5.3 Explain the ownership

and control of radio/

television by

educational

institutions

5.4 Explain the

ownership

and control of radio/

television by

communities

5.5 Examine the systems

of radio/television

ownership and control

-Explain differences

between public and

private or

commercial

ownership

-Explain the control

of radio and

Television for

private or

commercial

Analysis the

Government system

of radio/television

ownership,

Structure and

control.

Practical not

required

Is there any

difference

between

school/institut

ion

&government

control of

Radio/Televis

ion

information

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 6.0: Understand the functions and uses of radio/television equipment

42

11-12 6.1 List types functions

and uses of

microphones

6.2 State the functions

and uses of a

television camera

6.3 State the functions

and uses of a

teleprompter

6.4 Identify the functions

and uses of the radio

console 100

6.5 Identify the functions

and uses of the

Vision mixer

6.6 Explain the functions

of the multimedia

projector

6.7 Explain the functions

of the transmitter

6.7 Explain the functions

and of the Video System

Explain the

transmitter

Show students

the video camera

its parts and

functions

Take thin to the

audio control RM

Discuss functions

of OB Van

Explain the

functions and of the

View part

of

microscope

s, cameras

& explain

their

functions

Demonstrat

e recording

processes

Visit a

Broadcast

facility

with OB

Van

Use video and

radio to

Guide the

students to view

part of

microscopes,

cameras &

explain their

functions

demonstrate

recording

processes

visit a

Broadcast

facility with OB

Van

Assist students to

Use video and

Camera

Audio

control

Room

Interacti

ve

wiring

board

Newspaper,

magazines ,

Draw a

microphone,

cameras.

List the

function of

each

Enumerate

the functions

43

6.8 Explain the functions

and uses of

video/sound

recording systems.

6.9 Explain the functions

and characteristics of

a radio/television

systems

6.10 Explain the features

and functions of

outside broadcasting

operations.

Video System,

Video/sound

recording systems.

Explain the

functions and

characteristics of a

radio/television

systems

Explain the features

and functions of

outside broadcasting

operations.

observe the

functions and

of the Video

System and

Video/sound

recording

systems.

Watch TV and

listen to

radio/televisio

n systems

Watch TV and

Radio to see

the features

and functions

of outside

broadcasting

operations.

radio to observe

the functions and

of the Video

System and

Video/sound

recording systems.

Watch TV and

listen to

radio/television

systems

Watch TV and

Radio to see the

features and

functions of

outside

broadcasting

operations.

Radio

recorder

/player

Television,

video

and of the

Video System

and

Video/sound

recording

systems,

TV and listen

to

radio/televisio

n systems

Sketch to

reveal the

features of

TV and Radio

and their

function.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 7.0: Know the nature of radio and TV writing

13 7.1 Explain ways of writing

for radio/television and

newspaper

7.4 Compare and contrast

writing for radio

television and newspaper

Discuss writing

formats for radio

and television

Compare and

contrast writing for

radio

television and

newspaper

Practice radio

writing

formats and

television

writing

formats

Write for

radio and

Put students

through the

practices of radio

writing formats

and television

writing formats

Guide

students

to write

out

discuss

formats

taught

Assignmen

ts to

evaluate

grasp of

formats

discussed

in general

objective

7.1 -7.2

44

television

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 8.0: Understand the role of National and international broadcasting organizations.

14 8.1 State the political

and economic

implications of

National/internationa

l broadcasting

8.2 Explain the roles of

international

broadcasting

organizations such as

EBU, ABA, IBI,

International

Telecommunication

satellite Organization

(INTELSAT) , and

Image makers

national Trade show

based in Canada.

CONSAC

8.3 Identify the major

news agencies.

Explain

concepts of

national/interna

tional

Broadcast

Discuss

Political/Econo

mic

implications

Analyse the

implications

information on

the “global

village”

Discuss roles of

broadcast

organization

such

NO

PRACTICAL

REQUIRED

Evaluation

should be

based on the

interactive

sessions.

45

ND1 SECOND SEMESTER

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS MEDIA

COURSE TITLE: ENGLISH FOR MASS MEDIA II

COURSE CODE: MAC 121

DURATION: 2 HOURS/WEEK

GOAL: This course is designed to enable the students to correctly apply the skills he acquired in the

previous English Course.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

1.0 Know how to read and interpret a given passage

2.0 Know how to write good business letters

3.0 Know how to write a good technical report

4.0 Appreciate literary works

46

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

COURSE: English for Mass Media COURSE CODE MAC 121 CONTACT HOURS/CREDIT

UNIT 2/ 2 hrs/week

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THEORY Theoretical: hours/week

Year: ND Semester: Pre-requisite: Practical: hours/week

Week GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 1.0 Know how to read and interpret a given passage

THEORETICAL CONTENT PRACTICAL CONTENT

1-3 General Objectives 1.0: Know how to handle different types of news events

Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Specific

Learning

Outcome

Teacher

Activities

Resources

(practical and

theoretical

Evaluation

1.1 Use the appropriate

technique to read a

passage

1.2 Pick out topic

sentences in a passage

1.3 Define words, phrases

and expressions as

used in a passage

1.4 Answer the different

types of

comprehension

questions.

Discuss the

various

techniques of

reading a

passage.

Identify topic

sentences in

passages and

answer the

comprehension

questions.

Books

Library

Internet

Dictionary

Books

Library

Internet

Dictionary

Books

Library

Internet

Assign

tasks on

relevant

topics.

47

1.5 Pick out the salient

points in a passage

Dictionary

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 2.0 Know how to write good business letters

4-7 2.1 Define the technical

Report

2.2 Use the proper language

for business letters

2.3 Use the correct tone in

writing a business letter

2.4 Write different types of

Business letters.

Explain

technical report

Explain proper

language for

Business letters

Explain the

correct tone in

writing a

business letter.

Explain different

types of

business letters

Show the

different

types of

business

letters

Practice the

use of proper

language for

Business

letter

Show the

different types

of business

letters

Discuss use of

proper language

and tone in

business letters.

Understand the

different types of

business letters

Books

Library

Internet

Books

Library

Internet

Books

Library

Internet

Enumerate the

advantages of

proper

language

for

business letters

and

Use of correct

tone in

writing a

business letter

48

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 3.0 Know how to write a good technical report

8-10 3.1 Define the technical

report

3.2 List the different kinds

of technical reports

3.3 State the different

forms

of presenting technical

reports

.

3.4 Define the five major

headings of a technical

report that is in letter

form

Discuss activities

involved to good

technical report.

List the different

kinds of technical

reports

- State the different

forms of presenting

technical reports

-Enumerate the

aims of

Technical reports

list the essential

qualities of technical

reports

Define

- the five major

headings of a

technical report that

is in letter form

illustrate the

essential

qualities

of technical

reports

Practice the

writing of a

good

technical

report

List the qualities of

technical reports,

aims

Show an example

of a good technical

report.

Books

Library

Internet

Books

Library

Internet

Books

Library

Internet

Books

Library

Internet

Books

Library

Internet

write a good

technical

report on a

given

assignment

write a good

technical

report on a

given

assignment

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 4.0 Appreciate literary works

11-14 4.1 Analyze the various

aspects of a novel, a

play or a poem

4.2 Explain the themes of

-Explain the various

aspects of a novel, a

play or a poem

-Explain the themes

Books

Library

Internet

Dictiona

ry

What is the

characteristics

of a good

literary works,

49

a novel, a play or a

poem

4.3 Analyse the

characters in a novel,

a play or poem

4.4 Evaluate the writer‟s

technique in any

literary work.

4.5 Explain a writer‟s

style

4.6 Explain the structure of

a literary work.

of a novel, a play or

a poem

-Analyse the

characters in a

novel, a play or

poem

-Evaluate the

writer‟s technique in

any literary work.

-Explain a writer‟s

style

Explain the structure

of a literary work.

Books

Library

Internet

Dictiona

ry

Books

Library

Internet

Dictiona

ry

Read and

feature out

characters in a

novel, and

poem

Comment

writers style.

Enumerate the

structure of a

literary work.

50

Department/Programme: MASS COMMUNICATION (ND)

Course: Basic Computer Application for

Mass Media II

Course Code: MAC

123

Credit hours: 2 hours/week

Year: ND I Semester 2 Theoretical: 1hour/week

Practical: 1 hour/ week

General Objectives:

On completion of this course the student should be able to:

Understand the basic concepts of spreadsheet, database and presentation application

Know how to use Spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel

Know how to use database program such as Microsoft Access for compilation and processing of information

Know how to use presentation program (such as Microsoft PowerPoint) in mass media operation

Know to use the Internet as a communication and research tool in mass media operations.

51

Theoretical content Practical Content

Week Specific Learning

outcomes

Teacher‟s

activities

Specific Learning

Outcomes

Teacher‟s

activities

Resources

General Objective 1: Understand the basic concepts of spreadsheet, database and presentation

application environments

52

1-3 1.0: Describe the

functions

spreadsheet,

database and

presentation

applications and

their possible uses

in the mass media

operations.

1.2 Identify

common types of

spreadsheet,

database and

presentation

applications use

by mass media

organisations

Discuss the

functions

spreadsheet,

database and

presentation

applications and

how each is used

in mass media

operations

Describe the

specific types of

spreadsheet,

database and

presentation

applications use

by mass media

organisations

Show the

functions and

applications of

spreadsheet,

database and

presentation

softwares in the

mass media

operations

See the common

spreadsheet,

database and

presentation

softwares used by

the mass media

organisations in

Nigeria

List the

functions

and uses of

spreadsheet,

database and

presentation

softwares in

the mass

media

operations

anatomy of

computers

Books,

Diagrams/cha

rts, Internet

53

1.3. Explain the

working

environments of

each of the

application

identified in 1.2.

Describe working

environments and

interface of each

of the application

identified in 1.2

See the working

environments of

each of the

application

identified in 1.2

Illustrate

working

environment/

interface of

of each of

the

application

identified in

1.2

54

General Objective 2.0: Know how to use Spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel

4-5 2.1 Discuss

ways

Spreadsheet

application

are used in

mass media.

2.2 Describe

application of

Spreadsheet

programs in

compilation,

searching and

processing of

information.

Explain uses of

spreadsheet

application in

mass media

Discuss

application of

Spreadsheet

programs in

compilation,

searching and

processing of

information.

Show different ways

Spreadsheet program

are used in TV,

Advertising, etc

See different ways

Spreadsheet program are

used in TV, Advertising, etc

Books,

Diagrams/charts

Internet,

Computer (with

Spreadsheet

program/

application

installed)

General Objective 3.0: Know how to use database program such as Microsoft Access for compilation and

processing of information

55

6-8 3.1 Discuss

ways database

application

are used in

mass media.

2.2 Describe

application of

database

programs in

mass media

practices such

as newspaper,

magazine,

radio, TV,

internet,

advertising

etc

Explain ways

database program

are used in TV,

Advertising, etc

Discuss Explain

uses of

spreadsheet

application in

mass media

Discuss

application of

database

programs in in

mass media

practices such as

newspaper,

magazine, radio,

TV, internet,

advertising etc

Show different ways

database program are

used in TV,

Advertising, etc

Demonstrate different ways

database program are used

in TV, Advertising, etc

Books,

Diagrams/charts

Internet,

Computer (with

Database

program/

application

installed)

56

General Objective: 4.0 Know how to use presentation program (such as Microsoft

PowerPoint) in mass media operation

57

9-11 4.1 Discuss

ways of

presentation

application

such as such

as Microsoft

PowerPoint

are used in

mass media.

2.2 Describe

application of

presentation

programs in

mass media

practices such

as newspaper,

magazine,

radio, TV,

internet,

advertising

etc Discuss

common on

screen

elements of

Explain ways of

presentation of

program and how

they are used in

TV, Advertising,

etc

Discuss Explain

uses of

spreadsheet

application in

mass media

Discuss

application of

presentation

programs in in

mass media

practices such as

newspaper,

magazine, radio,

TV, internet,

advertising etc

Demonstrat

e production

of

professional

looking

presentation

s, which can

be printed

out directly

onto slides

for use with

an overhead

projector,

displayed

directly on a

computer

screen or

via a

computerize

d projector.

Practice how to

produce

professional

looking

presentations,

which can be

printed out directly

onto slides for use

with an overhead

projector,

displayed directly

on a computer

screen or via a

computerized

projector.

Books,

Diagrams/charts,

Internet,

Computer (with

Presentation

application

installed)

58

General Objective 5.0: Know to use the Internet as a communication and research tool in mass media operations.

59

11-13 5.1Explain

the term

Internet

Document

5.2 Describe

basic

components

of the internet

5.3 Describe

the various

Internet

services

5.4 Explain

how to use

the for

information

storage,

processing

and retrieval

Discuss the

meaning of

Internet

the difference

Discuss the

differences

between the

World Wide Web

(WWW) and the

Internet?

Explain basic

components of

the internet.

Discuss how to

use the internet

for information

storage,

processing and

retrieval

Illustrâtes

the basic

components

of the

internet

Illustrate

the uses of

various

internet

services

Demonstrat

e the

application

of the

internet for

information

and media

content

storage,

processing

and

retrieval.

Practice the use of

various internet

services

Books,

Diagrams/charts

Computer, Internet,

(with appropriate

application installed)

Practice the use

of various

internet services

Set questions

based on the

observations

made

60

Department/ Programme: NATIONAL

DIPLOMA IN MASS COMMUNICATION

Course Code:

MAC 124

Contact Hours:

Subject/Course: COMPUTER GRAPHICS

FOR MASS MEDIA

DUCATION: 3

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE: 1ST

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours/week

Year: Semester: Pre-requisite: Practical: hours /week

GOAL: This course is design to enable the understand graphic principles, acquire skills in the use of relevant graphic software and produce

graphic materials for the main media

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

1.0 Know the different types of elements of graphic.

2.0 Know the different types of graphic elements used in the mass media.

3.0 Know the position of a graphic designer in the production of mass media materials such as newspaper, magazines, books and web

etc.

4.0 Understand typography and its uses

5.0 Know how to analyze paper and ink qualities.

6.0 Know different types of layout and designs..

7.0 Appreciate graphic design in television.

8.0 Know how to prepare simple set designs.

9.0 Know how to design captions for television programmes.

10.0 Know the uses of graphics in adverts and production

61

Course: COMPUTER GRAPHICS

FOR MASS MEDIA

Course Code: MAC 124 Contact Hours: 3

Theoretical: hours/week

Year: ND 1 Pre-requisite: - FIRST Practical: hours /week

Theoretical Content Practical Content

General Objective 1.0: Know the different types of elements in graphics and their uses

Week/s Specific Learning Outcomes

Teacher‟s activities Resources (Theoretical/

practical)

Specific Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’s

activities

Evaluation

1 1.1 Define graphics.

1.2 Name the elements of

graphics in a newspaper,

magazine, book, tv, advert

PR copy e.g. type faces,

illustration, captions logo.

1.3 Identify the uses and

functions of graphics in the

various mass media.

1.4 Know the different types of

graphic elements used in the

Mass Media.

i. Explain graphics.

ii. List and define the

elements of graphics

in a newspaper,

magazine, book, tv,

advert, PR copy e.g.

type faces,

illustration, captions

logo/

iii. Explain the uses and

functions of graphics

in various mass

media.

Books

Computers relevant

software

Practical not

required

General Objectives: 2.0 Know the position of a computer graphic designer in the production of mass media material such as

newspapers, books, tv, web, etc.

62

Week Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher’s activities Resources (Theoretical/

practical)

Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher‟s

activities

Evaluation

2 2.1 Name the professionals

involved in producing

printed material to be used

as a communication

material.

2.2 State the functions of each

of the professionals named

in (2.1) above.

2.3 Define the functions of a

graphic designer

i. Explain the three

professionals

involved in

producing printed

material.

ii. Explain the

functions of each

professional.

iii. Explain the

functions of a

graphic designer.

Books

Computers relevant

software

General Objectives: 3.0 Understand typography and its uses

Week Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher’s activities Resources (Theoretical/

practical)

Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher‟s

activities

Evaluation

3 3.1 Define typography

3.2 Identify the uses of

typography

1. Explain typography, its

importance and uses.

Books

Type faces

Illustrations

General Objectives: 4.0 Understand the system of measurement of types and type sizes

Week Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher’s activities Resources (Theoretical/

practical)

Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher‟s

activities

Evaluation

4 5.8 Identify types of measurement

5.9 Identify types of sizes

5.10 Identify the nature and

characteristics of typefaces.

5.11 select types of sizes for

different purposes

Discuss the nature and

characteristics of

typeface, by types and

sizes

Illustrations

Charts

Books

Type

See characteristics

of sizes and types of

face.

Show the

nature and

characteristic

s of typeface,

by type and

sizes

Discuss the

nature and

characterist

ics of

faces, by

types and

sizes

General Objectives: 5.0 Know the type of paper and ink quality for different purposes

63

Week Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher’s activities Resources (Theoretical/

practical)

Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher‟s

activities

Evaluation

5 5.1 Breakdown paper and ink

into the various categories.

5.2 Select the right paper and

ink qualities for specific

jobs.

i. Explain the various

categories of paper

and ink.

ii. Give guidelines on

how to select the

right paper qualities

for specific jobs.

Papers Practical not require

General Objectives:6.0 Know different types of layout and design

Week Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher’s activities Resources (Theoretical/

practical)

Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher‟s

activities

Evaluation

6 6.1 Identify various types of

make-ups, layouts and

designs.

6.2 Describe various software

for graphics design e.g.

Corel, AutoCAD,

proportion scale etc.

i. Demonstrate various

types of make-ups,

layout and design.

ii. Show various tools

for graphic designs

Dummy layout

sheet, proportion

scale

General Objectives: 7.0 Know the principles and techniques of graphic production

Week Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher’s activities Resources (Theoretical/

practical)

Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher‟s

activities

Evaluation

7 7.1 Identify different types of

posters, leaflets, handbills

etc.

7.2 Prepare various sizes and

formats for posters, leaflets,

Demonstrate how to

prepare various sizes

and formats of posters,

leaflets, handbills etc.

Posters

Relevant software

Books

Computers

i. Design

different types

of posters

leaflets,

handbills etc.

ii. Demonstrate

Show

different

types of

posters

leaflets,

handbills

Design

different

types of

posters

leaflets,

handbills

64

handbills etc.

7.3 Describe the techniques of

production of posters,

leaflets, handbills etc

7.4 Describe colour separation

procedure.

7.5 Distinguish between spot

colour manual and full

colour photographic

treatment

Describe the techniques

of production of such

posters, leaflets,

handbills etc.

colour

separation

procedure.

iii. Show the

difference

between spot

colour manual

and full colour

photographic

treatment.

etc.

Demonstrat

e colour

separation

procedure.

Show the

difference

between

spot colour

manual and

full colour

photograph

ic

treatment.

General Objectives: 8.0 Appreciate design in television

Week Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher’s activities Resources (Theoretical/

practical)

Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher‟s

activities

Evaluation

8 8.1 Explain the differences

between graphic design for

television news and

commercial production

i. Describe differences

between design for

television

production, news

and commercial.

ii. Explain the inter-

relationship between

television production

news and

commercials

Books

Computers

Relevant software

Show differences

between design for

television

production, news

and commercial.

Show the inter-

relationship

between television

production news

and commercials

Engage

students to

see the

differences

between

design for

television

production,

news and

commercial

.

Explain

the inter-

Enumerate

difference

s between

design for

television

production

, news and

commerci

al

65

relationship

between

television

production

news and

commercial

s

General Objectives: 9.0 Know how to prepare simple set design

Week Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher’s activities Resources (Theoretical/

practical)

Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher‟s

activities

Evaluation

9 Model a simple set design for

TV programme.

i. Explain how to plan

and model simple set

design for TV

programme.

ii. Demonstrate how to

construct a basic set

design for a simple

television

programme.

Books

Computers

Relevant software

9.1 Role model a

simple set

design for TV

programme.

plan and

model a

simple set

design for

TV

programme

.

plan and

model a

simple set

design for

TV

programm

e.

General Objectives: 10.0 Know how to design captions for television

Week Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher’s activities

Resources (Theoretical/

practical)

Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher‟s

activities

Evaluation

10-11 10.1Identify the 3 dimensional

elements in graphics.

10.2Design caption formats and

credits.

i. Explain the 3

dimensional

elements in graphics

ii. Demonstrate caption

and credit design

formats.

iii. Demonstrate how to

design basic

commercial

Posters

66

10.3Design basic commercial

advertisements.

10.4Design basic maps and

charts for television

advertisements.

iv. Demonstrate how to

design basic maps

charts for television

v. Demonstrate how to

lay out still

photographs for

television

programme.

General Objectives:11.0 Know the use of graphics in advertising/public relations

Week Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher’s activities Resources (Theoretical/

practical)

Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher‟s

activities

Evaluation

12-14 11.1Identify the use of graphics

in Ad/PR copy.

11.2Identify the differences

between graphic design in

advertising/PR and in

newspaper and television

i. Demonstrate the use

of graphic in Ad/PR

copy.

ii. Explain the

difference between

graphic design in

advertising/public

relations and in

newspaper and

television

Books

Computers

Relevant software

67

Department/ Programme: NATIONAL

DIPLOMA IN MASS

COMMUNICATION

Course Code:

MAC 125

Contact Hours/credit unit:

3

Subject/Course: INTERMEDIATE NEWS

WRITING AND REPORTING

DURATION: 3

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE:

2ND

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours/week 2

Year: ND1 Semester: 2nd Pre-requisite: Practical: 1 hours /week

GOAL: This is a continuation of MAC 115 – Introduction to reporting and news writing, The course designed to further expose

the student to the general areas of news reporting and the method of dealing with the different news areas

On completion of this course the student should:

1.0 Know how to handle different types of news events

2.0 Know the potential limitations of reporting

3.0 Appreciate the qualities of a good news copy

4.0 Understand the role of research in reporting

5.0 Understand News Stories

6.0 Know how to write specialized News

7.0 Know how to write the specified type

0.0

Course: INTERMEDIATE NEWS

WRITING AND REPORTING Course Code: MAC 125 Contact Hours/credit

unit: 3/3

Course Specification: Theoretical:hours/week

Year: ND 2 Semester: Pre-requisite: Practical: hours/week 1

68

THEORETICAL CONTENT PRACTICAL CONTENT

General Objectives 1.0: Know how to handle different types of news events

Week Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/

Practical)

Evaluation

1-2 News Events

1.1 Distinguish between

the different types of

news events and their

characteristics e.g.

persons and

personalities,

meetings,

conventions,

speeches, illness,

deaths, disasters,

police, crime, court,

civil and criminal

cases, appeals,

elections, government

(local, state, national,

international, etc).

1.2 Compare the

problems of covering

the different events.

Explain

different

types of

News events

and their

attendant

hazards on

the reporter.

.

Compare

house styles

Link

research

with News

Reporting.

Observe different

types of News

Suits.

Show hazards of

News reporting

Compare house

styles

Link research with

News Reporting

Assign

students to

beat in and

around the

campus

Discuss the

identified

hazards and

the way

forward.

.

Compare

house styles

Link research

with News

Reporting

Digital

Audio

Recorders

Digital Video

cameras

Reporter‟s

Notebook

Explain different

types of News

Suits.

List hazards of

News reporting

What is the

technical News

Copy?

Differentiate house

styles

Link research with

News Reporting

General Objective 2.0: Know the potential limitations of reporting

3-4

Limitations

2.1 Identify the hazards

of reporting.

Explain the

hazards of

reporting.

Illustrate the hazards

of reporting.

Guide

students in

identifying

Field

reporting,

Internet

Enumerate the

hazards of

reporting the

69

2.2 State the ethical

limitations

2.3 Explain the legal

limitations

2.4 Explain the house

style.

2.5 Use the house style.

Discuss the

ethical and

legal

limitations

Discuss the

different

house styles

in operation..

See other ethical

limitations from

other sources

Explore the legal

limitations in the

house style.

hazardous

areas of

reporting.

Find out the

ethical

limitations

from other

sources like

the internet

Explore the

legal

limitations in

the house

style, using

internet

services.

services ethical limitations,

and the legal

limitations

General Objectives 3.0: Appreciate the qualities of a good news copy

5-6

News Copy

3.1 Identify common

faults in lead

writing.

3.2 Define good news

copy.

3.3 Enumerate the

qualities of a good

news copy.

Examine

common

faults in lead

writing.

Read good

news copy in

class.

Enumerate the

qualities of a

good news

List common faults

in lead writing.

Read some good

news copies.

Enumerate the

qualities of a good

news copy.

Practice how to

write a good news

Gather

common

faults in lead

writing.

Read good

news copies.

Guide

students to

Enumerate

the qualities

of a good

Magazines,

newspapers

Writing

materials

News rooms

Examine common

faults in lead

writing.

Read good news

copies.

Enumerate the

qualities of a good

news copy.

-write a good news

copy.

70

3.4 Explain how to

write a good news

copy.

3.5 Write a good news

copy.

copy.

Explain how

to write a

good news

copy.

Write a good

news copy.

copy.

news copy.

Explain how

to write a

good news

copy.

Write a good

news copy

71

General Objectives: 4.0 Understand the role of research in reporting

7-8 Research

4.1 Define Research.

4.2 Explain what

research means in

reporting.

4.3 State how research

can be applied in

reporting

4.4 Report a researched

news item.

Define

Research.

Explain what

research

means in

reporting.

State how

research can

be applied in

reporting

Report a

researched

item.

Practical not

required

Define

Research.

How is the two

terms related

research and

reporting.

General Objectives: 5.0 Understand News Stories

9-10

Media Requirements

5.1 Analyse writing

news for the radio and

television with

emphasis on:

a) similarities

b) differences

c) specific devices in

writing and

Explain the

process of

writing news

for the radio

and television

with

emphasis on:

a) similarities

b) differences

Practice writing

news for the

Newspapers, radio

and television with

emphasis on:

a) similarities

b) differences

c) specific devices in

writing and

Guide

students to

write news

for

newspapers,

radio and

television

with

emphasis on:

Radio and

television,

newspapers.

Write news for

newspapers

radio and

television with

emphasis on:

a) similarities

b) differences

c) specific

devices in

72

presentation. c) specific

devices in

writing and

presentation

presentation a) similarities

b) differences

c) specific

devices in

writing and

presentation

writing and

presentation

General Objective 6.0: Know how to write specialized news

11-12

News Stories

6.1 Write news on

speeches, releases

and interviews

6.2 Cover meetings and

conventions.

6.3 Write on ports and

markets.

6.4 Write stories on

illness, deaths,

funerals, etc

6.5 Write on fires,

accidents, disease,

disasters and crime.

6.6 Write on seasons,

the weather, and

other natural

phenomena.

Explain how

to write news

on speeches,

releases and

interviews,

Cover

meetings and

conventions.

Write on

ports and

markets.

Write stories

on illness,

deaths,

funerals, etc

Write on

fires,

accidents,

disease,

Practice Writing

news on speeches,

releases and

interviews

Cover meetings

and conventions.

Visit ports and

markets.

Re-write stories

on illness, deaths,

funerals, etc

Re- write stories

on fires,

accidents, disease,

disasters and

crime.

Re-write stories

on seasons, the

Guide

students to

Practice

Writing news

on speeches,

releases and

interviews

Cover

meetings and

conventions.

Visit ports

and markets.

Re-write

stories on

illness,

deaths,

funerals, etc

Re- write

stories on

Hospitals,

markets

places, towns

and villages

Hospitals,

markets

places, towns

and villages

Write samples of

news on speeches,

releases and

interviews

.

Write stories on

illness, deaths,

funerals,

, disease, disasters

and crime.

Write stories on

seasons, the

weather, and other

natural

phenomena.

73

disasters and

crime.

Write on

seasons, the

weather, and

other natural

phenomena.

weather, and other

natural

phenomena.

fires,

accidents,

disease,

disasters and

crime.

Re-write on

seasons, the

weather, and

other natural

phenomena.

Week General Objectives: 7.0 Know how to write the specialized t type of report

13

Specialised Type

7.1 Write news stories

on court

proceedings trials

and law suits.

7.2 Write news stories

on government and

politics.

7.3 Write news stories

on business,

7.4 industry,

agriculture and

Write news

stories on

court

proceedings

trials and law

suits.

Write news

stories on

government

and politics.

Write news

Visit a court

Practice how to

write news stories

on court

proceedings trials

and law suits.

Watch activities

on government

and politics.

Watch films on

Guide

students

through

activities in

column four.

Films , TV,

Visit to

courts,

industries etc.

Write news

stories on

court

proceedings

trials and law

suits.

74

labour. stories on

business,

industry,

agriculture

and labour

business, industry,

agriculture and

labour activities.

Write your

observation

Week General Objective: 8.0 Know how to appreciate prose passages

14

Appraisal

8.1 Describe the

organization of prose

passages.

8.2 Assess a writer‟s

treatment of his

subject

8.3 Analyse a writer‟s

style

Explain the

organization

of prose

passages,

analyze the

style and the

writer‟s

treatment of

his style

Books, new

papers

75

ND1 SECOND SEMESTER

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS MEDIA

COURSE TITLE: PRINCIPLES OF PUBLIC RELATIONS

COURSE CODE: MAC 126

DURATION: 4HOURS/WEEK

GOAL: This course is designed intended to enable the student acquire the knowledge and skills in

public relations practice to improve relationships among people and organizations.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

1.0 understand the scope and functions of public relations

2.0 know the evolution of public relations

3.0 understand the public relations environment

4.0 understand the relationship between public relations and persuasion

5.0 understand public relations organization

6.0 understand the nature of public relations activities

7.0 know the tools of public relations

8.0 know the public relations consultancy

9.0 know the legal environment of public relations

76

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

COURSE: PRINCIPLES OF PUBLIC

RELATIONS

COURSE CODE MAC 126 CONTACT HOURS/CREDIT

UNIT 2/ hrs/week 2

Course Specification: Theoretical: hours/week

YEAR: ND 1 Semester: 2 Pre-requisite: Practical: hours/week

WEEK GENERAL OBJECTIV: 1.0: Understand the scope and functions of public relations

12- 15 THEORETICAL CONTENT PRACTICAL CONTENT

General Objectives 1.0: Know how to handle different types of news events

Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Specific

Learning

Outcome

Teacher

Activities

Resources Evaluation

1-2 1.1 Define public

relations as a

philosophy of

management

1.2 Define public

relations as a

social institution

1.3 Define public

relations as

policies/action

1.4 Define public

relations as good

management

Explain the

terms to students;

public;

philosophy,

management, the

concepts of PR

Take time to

analyse words

and concept of

the definitions

Explain the

nature public

relating activities

Explain the PR

environment

Organize

visits to

MOCK

AGM‟S

Plan visit

to PR

organizatio

ns

Guide student in

-Organizing athe

visits to MOCK

AGM‟S

Plan visit to PR

organizations

Interactive

Board

Books

Journals

Periodicals

Internet

organizatio

ns

write reports

On return to

PR

organization,

77

1.5 Define public

relations as

policies for

relations with

specific publics

1.6 Explain public

relations as a

function of

management and

employees

1.7 Identify the

improper use of

public relations

1.8 Explain the

relationship

publicity and

Propaganda

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 2.0 Know the evolution of public relations

3-4 2.1 Trace the history of

public relations

2.2 state the current status

of public relations with

special reference to

Nigeria

2.3 State the reasons for

Explain the

origins of PR

Discuss growth

of PR today the

future prospects

Discuss role of

PR in conflict

resolution

Show

examples

of PR by

recalling

names &

date

associated

with

founder in

Guide

students to

See examples of

PR by recalling

names & date

associated with

founder in UK,

U.S.A etc.

PR

Organizatio

ns,

Explain the

origins of PR

78

the growth of public

relations and its future

2.4 Outline the nature of

Public relations in

Conflict/crisis/situation

2.5 Explain public relations

as a component

UK, U.S.A

etc.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 3.0 Understand the public relations environment

3.1 State public relations

trends in the ever

changing world

Explain current

Trends in PR Students

should be

able to

assayable

trends

within the

discussion

and make

them their

own

Guide

students to

grasp trends

Books

Internet

Recall and

describe in

their own

works

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 4.0 Understand the relationship between public relations and persuasion

6-8

4.1 Define public

4.2 Define public

opinions

4.3 Outline attitudes in

opinion formation

Explain the links

between

Public

Opinions of publics

Persuasion in

shaping behavior

Demonstrate

ability to

grasp

meaning of

definition.

Watch

Lead

students

to

Demonstrate

ability to grasp

meaning of

definition.

Interactive

writing Board

Books internet

Differentiates

between

Persuasion &

Propaganda;

What is the

79

4.4 Outline the formation

of public relation

4.5 Explain the growth in

the power of public

opinion

4.6 Distinguish between

public relations and

propaganda and

persuasion

4.6 Outline the role of

public relations in

behavioral change

4.7 State the laws of

public opinion

4.8 Define the principles

of persuasion.

State the laws of

public opinion

Define the principles

of persuasion.

differences

between

Persuasion &

Propaganda;

Watch Public

opinion their

roles in

shaping

behavior

Watch

differences

between

Persuasion &

Propaganda;

Watch Public

opinion their

roles in

shaping

behavior

Practical not

required

role of Public

opinion , in

shaping

behavior

80

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 5.0 Understand public relations in organizations

5.1 State the types of

public relations in

Organizations Internal

and External

5.2 Outline the basic

objectives of public

relations departments

5.3 State the place of

public

relations in corporate

organizations

5.4 State the sources of

public relations budget

5.5 Identify budgetary

methods for public

relations.

Explain clearly

Types of PR in

Internal/External

organizations

Basic depts. of

PR

PR in corporate

organizations

Source of PR

budgets

Budgetary

methods

See types

of PR in

Internal/Exter

nal

organizations

.

illustrations

stated in specific

learning

outcomes

Interactive

writing

Board,

students

themselves

also

constitute

Resources

List the

basic

objectives of

public

relations

departments

State the

place of

public

relations in

corporate

organizations

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 6.0 Understand the nature of public relations activities

11 6.1 illustrate the planning

and programming of

public relations

activities

6.2 Explain public

relations

as fact finding,

Explain process

involved in stated

specific learning

outcome

Practical not

required Interactive

writing

Board and

students

Quizzes

81

feedback and

evaluation

6.3 Evaluation the action

and communication

processes of public

relations

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 7.0 Know the tools of public relations

12 7.1 Explain the house

organ as a public

relations tool

7.2 State other tools of

Public relations (e.g

Speeches,

documentaries news

releases, news

briefings,

news conferences, etc)

7.3 Explain advertising as

a

Tool of public relations

State tools of PR

and Role of

advertising in PR

Explain advertising

as a

Tool of public

relations

Illustrate

tools of PR

Explore

different

advertising as

a Tool of

public

relations

Cut out

speeches,

news

briefings

press release

from papers

of video

sources for

analysis

Watch different

types of

advertisements

as a Tool of

public relations

Newspaper

clips, video

clips etc

Advertisement

s in TV, radio

and

newspapers

Oral

Questions

shared

discussion

s,

critiques

etc

Explain

advertising as

a

Tool of

public

relations

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 8.0 Know the public relations consultancy

13 8.1 Describe the public

relations consultancy

8.2 Explain how the

Describe the public

relations

consultancy work

Visit the

public

relations

consultancy

Guide students

through the

visits to public

relations

public

relations

consultancy

offices

Describe the

public

relations

consultancy

82

consultant operates Explain how the

consultant operates

offices

See how the

consultant

operates

consultancy

offices

Explain how

the

consultant

operates

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 9.0 Know the legal environment of public relations.

14 9.1 Analyze the legal

environment of public

relations practitioners in

Nigeria

9.2 Explain the public

relations officer‟s access

to information and the

media.

9.3 Explain the public

relations officer‟s

lobbying techniques

9.4 Explain to what extent

the practitioner is a

professional

Explain the legal

angle to PR

Explain lobby

and lobbying

methods

Discuss

“Professional

qualities of a PR

person

Explain the public

relations officer‟s

lobbying techniques

Explain to what

extent the

practitioner is a

professional

Illustrate

techniques

displayed if

sent or

specific PR

missions

Watch the

public

relations

officer‟s

lobbying

techniques

Demonstrate

to what extent

the

practitioner is

seen as a

professional

Guide students

to relate

discussion to the

observable

world of PR

persons

Guide students

to see the public

relations

officer‟s

lobbying

techniques

Illustrate his

limit extent the

practitioner is a

professional

Interactive

writing

Board

Internet

public

relations

officer‟s

Describe

techniques

displayed if

sent or

specific PR

missions

What are the

public

relations

officer‟s

lobbying

techniques

83

Department/ Programme: NATIONAL

DIPLOMA IN MASS

COMMUNICATION

Course Code: MAC

127

Contact Hours/credit

unit: 2/2

Subject/Course: PRINCIPLES OF

ADVERTISING

DURATION: 3

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE:

1ST

SEMESTER

Theoretical:

hours/week

Year: ND1 Semester: 2

ND Pre-requisite: NONE Practical: hours /week

GOAL: The course is designed to expose the students to the historical development and role of advertising in

society as well.

It also aims to familiarize the student with types of

Advertising as well as the legal, social and ethical environment of advertising.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course the student should:

1.0 Understand advertising.

2.0 Know the history of advertising.

3.0 Know the roles and structures of advertising agencies, advertisers, media and media independents.

4.0 Appreciate the role of advertising in the society.

5.0 Understand the various types of advertising.

6.0 Understand how psychological motivation influences advertising.

7.0 Understand the role of research in advertising.

8.0 Understand the legal, social and ethical environment of advertising.

84

Course: PRINCIPLES OF ADVERTISING Course Code: MAC 127 Contact Hours:

2

Course Specification: Theoretical:

hours/week

Year: ND Semester: Pre-requisite: Practical:

Hours/week

THEORETICAL CONTENT PRACTICAL CONTENT N/A

General Objectives: 1.0 Understand advertising

Week/

s

Specific Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’s activities Specific

Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’s activities Resources

(Theoretical

practical)

Evaluation

1 1.1 Define

advertising.

1.2 Distinguish

between

advertising,

publicity, public

relations and

propaganda.

i. Explain the term

advertising giving

its various

definitions

ii. Explain the roles

of advertising,

publicity,

promoting public

relations and

propaganda

showing how they

are distinguished

from each other

Practical not required Books

Journals

Periodicals

Internet

General Objectives: 2.0 Know the history of advertising

2 2.1 Explain the

history of

Trace the history of

the origin and

development of

Practical not

required

Books

Journals

Periodicals

85

advertising.

advertising, laying

emphasis Journals on

the Nigerian situation

Internet

86

General Objectives: 3.0 Know the roles and structure of advertising agencies, advertisers media and media

independence

3-4 3.1 Explain “advertising

agency

3.2 Explain “advertiser”

3.3 Explain “advertising

media

3.4 Explain „media

independent‟

3.5 Describe the

organization of a

typical advertising

agency, advertiser,

organization, media

and media

Independent.

3.6 Describe the

functions of the

advertising agency.

3.7 Describe the

functions of the

advertising unit of

an Advertiser

organization.

i. Explain the term

advertising agency.

ii. Explain the term

advertiser

iii. Explain the term

advertising media

iv. Explain the term

media Independent

v. Explain the

organizational

structures of

agencies,

advertiser‟s

organization media

houses media

independent outfits.

vi. Explain the different

functions of an

advertising agency.

vii. Explain the different

functions of an

advertiser

organization

viii. Explain the different

career prospects in

adverting

Practical not

required

Practical not

required

Books

Journals

Periodicals

Internet

Journals

Periodicals

Internet

87

3.8 Describe the

functions of the

advertisement/

marketing.

3.9 Explain career

prospect in

advertising

88

General Objectives: 4.0 Appreciate the role of advertising in the society

5-6 Explain the place of

advertising within the

social structure.

Explain the relationship

between advertising

and marketing.

List the marketing

conditions that make

advertising a necessity

in society

i. Explain the roles

that advertising play

in society e.g.

(Information,

awareness,

promotion of ideals

etc.

ii. Explain how

advertising and

marketing are inter

related.

iii. Enumerate the

conditions that make

advertising a strong

force in society e.g.

(mass production

and availability of

goods and services,

improved consumer

awareness and

income, shrinking of

the global market

etc)

Practical not

required

Practical not

required

Books

Journals

Periodicals

Internet

Books

Journals

Periodicals

Internet

General Objectives: 5.0 Understand the various types of advertising

7 5.1 Enumerate the

different types of

advertising.

5.2 List key advertising

i. Explain the various

types of advertising

(selective, hard-sell,

soft sell, display,

classified, local,

Practical not

required

Books

Journals

Periodicals

Internet

89

media.

5.3 Explain the

characteristics of the

adverting media and

the differences

between them.

5.4 Distinguish between

above – the - line

and below – the

line advertising.

regional, national

international etc).

ii. Enumerate and

classify the major

media of advertising

(e.g. radio, television,

newspaper,

magazine, cinema,

outdoor, transit,

internet etc).

iii. Explain the

characteristics of

various advertising

media.

iv. Define above- the -

line and below - the -

line

advertising,

explaining their

respective

characteristics.

Practical not

required

Practical not

required

90

General Objectives: 6.0 Understand how psychological motivation influences advertising

8 6.1 Identify the different

appeals used in

advertising

messages.

6.2 Examine the

psychological/behav

ioural pinnings of

these appeals and

how they determine

advertising

techniques.

i. Explain the major

appeals applied in

the formation of

advertising messages

(value, basic human

needs, rational,

emotional

differences etc)

ii. Explain how

psychological factors

influence advertising

techniques

Books

Journals

Periodicals

4) Internet

General Objectives: 7.0 understand the role of research in advertising

9-10 Define advertising

research.

Explain the importance

of research in

advertising.

Explain the basic

methods for conducting

advertising research.

i. Explain what is

implied by

advertising research.

ii. Explain the

importance of

research in

advertising giving

reasons.

iii. Explain the various

methods of

conducting research

in advertising

Books

Journals

Periodicals

4) Internet

General Objectives: 8.0 Know how to prepare and produce advertising materials

11-12

91

8.1 What is

adverting brief

8.2 Trace the stages

in the

preparation of

advertising

materials for

press,

magazine,

radio,

television,

outdoor and the

internet.

8.3 Write and

access advert

proposal.

8.4 Define

copywriting.

8.5 Define layout.

8.6 Prepare simple

copy/layout for

posters and

press

advertisements.

i. Identify the various

stages of preparing

advertising material

e.g. planning,

research, brain

storming, contact

reports, designs and

illustrations copy,

layout, story board

production etc.

ii. Explain the term

copywriting.

iii. Explain the term

layout and list the

various types of

layout.

iv. Demonstrate how to

prepare simple copy

and layout for

advertisements.

Present stages

of preparing

advertising

material e.g.

planning,

research,

brain

storming,

contact

reports,

designs and

illustrations

copy, layout,

story board

production

etc.

-practice

copywriting.

Illustrate

various types

of layout. For

advertisement

.

Guide students to

re-present

Present stages of

preparing

advertising

material e.g.

planning,

research, brain

storming, contact

reports, designs

and illustrations

copy, layout,

story board

production etc.

-practice

copywriting.

Illustrate various

types of layout.

For

advertisement

Books

Journals

Periodicals

4) Internet

Write what to

expect in the

following stages

of

preparing

advertising

material e.g.

planning,

research, brain

storming,

contact reports,

designs and –

with

illustrations

design a layout,

story board

92

General Objectives: 9.0 Understand the legal, social and ethical environment of advertising

13-14 1.1 Examine the legal,

ethical and social

environment for the

advertising of goods

and services (with

particular emphasis

on the Nigerian

situation).

1.2 Explain “illegal

advertisement”

1.3 List types/examples

of such

advertisements.

1.4 Explain the need for

a code of ethics in

advertising.

1.5 Examine the

Nigerian code of

advertising practice.

1.6 Explain the roles of

regulatory and

agency such as

Advertising

Practicing Council

i. Explain the

legal, social and

ethical frame

work for

advertising with

emphasis on

Nigerians.

ii. Explain what

constitutes

illegal

advertisement

iii. Give examples

of such

advertisement

iv. Explain the

major provisions

of the Nigerian

Code of

Advertising

Practice

v. Explain the

history and roles

of the listed

Pay visits

to some

advertising

practitione

rs of

Nigeria

such as:

Council of

Nigeria

(APCON)

profession

al bodies

like

Associatio

n of

Nigeria:

OAAN,

Advertiser

s

Associatio

n of

Nigeria

(ADVAN)

Guide students to visit

Council of Nigeria

(APCON) professional

bodies like

Association of Nigeria:

OAAN, Advertisers

Association of Nigeria

(ADVAN) BON –

Broadcasting

Organizations of

Nigeria.

Newspaper

Proprietors Association

of Nigeria (NPAN)

Media Independent

Practitioners

Association .

Books

Journals

Periodicals

4) Internet

Playback

facilities

- advertising

practitioners

of Nigeria

such as:

Association of

Nigeria:

OAAN,

Advertisers

Association of

Nigeria

(ADVAN)

BON –

Broadcasting

Organizations

of Nigeria.

Newspaper

Proprietors

Association of

Nigeria

(NPAN)

What do is the

Nigerian

- Code of

Advertising

Practice

- what

constitutes

illegal

advertisement

- Explain the

roles of

regulatory and

agency such as

Advertising

Practicing

Council of

Nigeria

(APCON)

professional

bodies like

Association of

Nigeria:

OAAN,

Advertisers

Association of

93

of Nigeria

(APCON)

professional bodies

like AAN

Association, of

Advertising

Practitioners of

Nigeria, Outdoor

advertising

regulatory and

professional bodies.

Association of

Nigeria: OAAN,

Advertisers

Association of

Nigeria (ADVAN)

BON –

Broadcasting

Organizations of

Nigeria. Newspaper

Proprietors

Association of

Nigeria (NPAN)

Media

Independent

Practitioners

Association of

Nigeria

(MIPAN) in the

central advertising

BON –

Broadcasti

ng

Organizati

ons of

Nigeria.

Newspaper

Proprietors

Associatio

n of

Nigeria

(NPAN)

Media

Independe

nt

Practitione

rs

Associatio

n

Media

Independent

Practitioners

Association

Nigeria

(ADVAN)

BON –

Broadcasting

Organizations

of Nigeria.

Newspaper

Proprietors

Association of

Nigeria

(NPAN) Media

Independent

Practitioners

Association of

Nigeria

(MIPAN) in the

central

advertising

practice.

94

practice.

1.7 Outline the

constraints of

consumerism.

95

DEPARTMENT: NATIONAL DIPLOMAL IN

MASSS COMMUNICATION

Course Code: MAC 211 Contact Hours/credit

unit: 2/2

CourSE: ENGLISH FOR MASS MEDIA III Theoretical: hours/week

Year: NDII Semester: Pre-requisite: - N/A Practical: hours /week

GOAL: This course is designed to enable the student develop skills in the writing of expository prose

General Objectives:

On completion of this course the student should:

1 Know the different types of prose

2 Know the qualities of a good essay

3 Know how to write good and well-ordered essay

4 Know the qualities of good style

5 Know the elements of style

6 Know how to appraise prose

7 Know how to take minutes at meetings

96

8 Know how to summarize

Course: ENGLISH FOR MASS MEDIA III Course Code: MAC 211 Contact Hours/credit

unit: 2/2

Course Specification: Theoretical: hours/week

Year: NDII Semester: Pre-requisite: - N/A Practical: hours /week

THEORETICAL CONTENT PRACTICAL CONTENT N/A

General Objective 1.0: Know how to take minutes at meetings

Week/s Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher‟s activities

Specific

Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’s

activities

Resources

(Theoretical

/practical)

Evaluation

97

1-2 1.1 Identify various types

of meetings e.g. Board

Meetings, Management

Meetings, Editorial

Meetings etc.

1.2 Write invitations for

meeting/agenda and

format of minutes.

1.3 Prepare template for

meetings

Study minutes of

different meetings

Study scripts of

invitations and

agenda

Show different

templates of

minutes.

Practical not

required Projector

Old minutes

Assign students to

write minutes

Hold mock

meetings

98

General Objective: 2.0 know how to summarize

Week Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher‟s activities Resources

(Theoretical/practic

al)

Specific

Learning

Outcomes

Teacher‟s

activities

Evaluati

on

3-4 2.1 Identify various

summary techniques

and methods.

2.2 Summarize actual

passages.

2.3 Write executive

summary

i. Study samples of

summarized

articles.

ii Study samples of

executive brief and

summarize actual

passages.

Practical not

required

Assign

students

to write

minutes

Hold

mock

meetings

General Objective: 3.0 know the different types of prose

5 Types of Prose

3.1 Outline the

characteristics of each

type of prose

3.3 Outline the

characteristics

of each type of

prose

3.4 Outline

the

characteri

stics of

each type

99

3.2 State the functions of

each type of prose

State the functions

of each type of

prose

of prose

State the

functions of

each type of

prose

General Objectives: 4.0 know the qualities of a good essay

Week Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher’s

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/practic

al)

Specific

Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’

s

activities

Evaluati

on

6-7 Essay qualities

4.1 Define thesis statement

4.2 List steps in organizing

an essay

4.3 State the functions of

introductory and

concluding paragraphs

in essays

4.4 List ways of achieving

coherence between

paragraphs

Explain thesis

statement

Explain steps in

organizing an essay

State the functions

of introductory and

concluding

paragraphs in essays

List ways of

achieving

coherence between

paragraphs

Practical not

required

Samples

of essay

writing

State the

steps in

organizi

ng an

essay

What are

the

functions

of

introduct

ory and

concludi

ng

paragrap

hs in

100

essays

General Objectives: 5.0 know how to write good and well-ordered essays

8-9

Writing

5.1 Write good essay

outlines.

5.2 Write a good

introductory paragraph.

5.3 Write effective topic

sentences for each

paragraph of an essay.

5.4 Write relevant well-

constructed sentences

to develop the topic

sentences.

-explain how to

write good essay

outlines.

-explain steps in

writing good

introductory

paragraph.

-Write topic

sentences for each

paragraph of an

essay.

-Write relevant

well-constructed

sentences to

develop the topic

sentences.

Practical not

required

Write

topic

sentence

s for

each

paragrap

h of an

essay.

101

General Objectives: 6.0 Know the qualities of good style

Week Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher’s

activities

Specific Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’s

activities

Resources

(Theoretical

/practical)

Evaluati

on

10 Qualities of Style

6.1 Define style.

6.2 List the qualities of a

good style.

6.3 State the elements of

style.

Define style.

List the qualities of

a good style.

State the elements

of style.

Show different

types of style.

See the qualities of

a good style.

Illustrate the

elements of style.

Take students

to see types

of styles,

quality of

good styles

and elements

of good

styles.

Samples of

styles

Define

style.

List the

qualities

of a

good

style.

State the

elements

of style.

General Objectives: 7.0 Know the elements of style

102

11-12 Elements of Style

7.0 Distinguish between

different levels of diction.

7.1 Identify types of

sentence structure used

in prose passages.

7.2 Explain the figures of

speech used in a given

passage.

7.3 Explain denotative and

connotative use of

words in paragraph

Distinguish between

different levels of

diction.

Explain types of

sentence structure

used in prose

passages.

Explain the figures

of speech used in a

given passage.

Explain denotative

and connotative use

of words in

paragraph

See different levels

of diction.

Show types of

sentence structure

used in prose

passages.

Practice the figures

of speech used in a

given passage.

Practice denotative

and connotative

use of words in

paragraph

Show students

different levels

of diction.

Show types of

sentence

structure used in

prose passages.

Practice the

figures of

speech used in a

given passage.

Practice

denotative and

connotative use

of words in

paragraph

Passages

in books

Write an

article to

show

sentence

structure

used in

prose

passages

figures of

speech

used in a

given

passage,

denotative

and

connotati

ve use of

words in

paragraph

General Objectives 8.0: Know how to summarise

13-14 8.1 Know how to appraise

prose passages

Explain the

organization of

103

PROGARAMME: NATIONAL

DIPLOMA IN MASS

COMMUNICATION

Course Code:

MAC 212

Contact Hours/Credit

Unit: 2

Subject/Course: INTRODUCTION TO

RESEARCH METHODS

Theoretical: Hours/week

1

Year: ND ll

Semester:

Pre-Requisite: Practical: Hours/week 1

GOAL: This course is designed to introduce the students to the methods/processes of scientific mass communication research,

so as to enable them carry out simple independent research project in mass communication

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

At the end of this course, students should:

1.0 Know the different ways of acquiring knowledge

2.0 Know what research is and its process

8.2 Describe the

organization of prose

passages

8.3 Assess a writer‟s

treatment and his

subject

8.4 Analyze a writer‟s

style

prose passages,

Analyse the style

and the writers

treatment of his

subject

104

3.0 Understand the differences between social research and research in the natural sciences

4.0 Know the terminologies of social research

5.0 Know the methods of social research

6.0 Know the sources and types of data

7.0 Know the methods of data collection

8.0 Know data processing

9.0 Know simple statistical measurements

10.0 Know how to write and present research report

11.0 Understand ethical issues in research

Course: INTRODUCTION

TO RESEARCH

METHODS

Course Code:

MAC 212

Contact Hours/credit Unit: 2

Theoretical: 1 Hours/Week

Year: ND

Semester:

Pre-Requisite: Practical: 1

Hours/week

General Objectives 1.0: Know the different ways of acquiring knowledge

Theoretical Content Practical Content

Week Specific Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’s activities Specific Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’s

activities

Resources Evaluation

1-2 1.1 Explain the four ways of

knowing

1.2 Describe the role of

research in the method of

science

1.3 Examine the superiority

of science over the

others

Explain ways of

knowing

Explain the

importance of

research in the

method of science

NA Books

Computers

with

appropriate

software

Give

assignments

to students

Grade

scripts and

105

Explain the

characteristics of the

science method

return

3-4 General Objectives 2.0: Know the various terminologies related to online journalism practice

2.1 Define social research

2.2 Describe the process of

social research e.g. the

research circle

2.3 Identify what are

involved in the various

states of social research

2.4 Describe the links

between the various

stages

2.5 Describe the various

types of research e. g.

descriptive experimental,

comparative etc.

Define social

research

Describe the process

from the

thinking/idea stage to

report presentation

Draw the research

circle to demonstrate

the inter-dependence

of the stage involved

in social research

Explain things

involved/activities to

be carried out at each

stage

NA NA Books

Computers

with

appropriate

software

Books journals

and relevant

article

Assign

tasks to

students

Return

graded

scripts

5 General Objectives 3.0: Understand the differences between social science research and research in the natural sciences

3.1 Describe the differences

between social research

and research in natural

science.

3.2 Identify the limitations

of social science research

Highlight the social

sciences and natural

science

Explain differences

NA NA Books journals

and relevant

article

Monitor

tasks given

to students

106

3.3 Distinguish between

quantitative and

qualitative research

3.4 Identify methods of

social research e .g

surveys, content,

analysis, experimental

etc.

between the two

using examples from

both, explain

differences in

research procedures e

.g social environment

control vs

uncontrolled research

Explain limitations in

both procedures e. g.

generalisability

Explain the

differences between

qualitative and

quantitative research

6 General Objectives 4.0: Know the terminologies of social research

4.1 Describe the

terminologies of social

research.

4.2 Explain how to use these

terms.

Explain the terms

used in social

research e. g.

samples and

sampling, variables

population,

measurement

NA Internet Give

assignments

to students

Grade

scripts and

return

7 General Objectives 5.0: Know the methods of social research

107

5.1 Define sampling.

5.2 Explain the two types of

sampling ie. Probability

and non-probability

5.3 Explain the advantages

and disadvantages of the

two

5.4 Explain the situation

when any of them is used

in social research

5.5 Explain the procedure of

sampling

5.6 Explain the uses of

sampling

Define sampling

using examples

demonstrate how to

draw (procedure)

samples e.g. lottery

methods, use of

sampling frame

Explain probability

and non-probability

sampling

Explain the different

types of each

Explain the situation

for using them and

their advantages and

limitations

NA Books

Rotating drum

Hat

Class

Register

Dice

Give

assignments

to students

Grade

scripts and

return

8 General Objectives 6.0: Know the sources and types of data

6.1 Identify the sources

of data for research

6.2 Explain the role of

the library in learning

and research

6.3 Describe the types of

materials available in

the library for

research e. g book,

journals, types

Define data

Explain the

sources of data

Explain the

importance of the

library

Explain the types

NA NA Books

Computers

with

appropriate

software

108

newspaper and

magazine,

encyclopedia and

other reference

materials and how to

access them.

6.4 Describe the use of

oral materials for

research

6.5 Describe the

importance and use

of the internet as a

source of data for

research

6.6 Describe the 2 types

of data (secondary

and primary) and

how to obtain them

6.7 Explain the

importance and

limitations of each of

them

of materials

available in the

library

D3esribe the use

of oral materials

for research

Explain the

importance of the

internet for

sourcing materials

Explain the two

types of data and

primary and

secondary data

Explain their uses

9 General Objectives 7.0: Know the methods of data collection

7.1 Distinguish different

types of data

7.2 Explain the different

methods of collecting

data e. g.

Explain different

types of data with

examples

Explain different

See different types of

data collection.

Design questionnaire

Books

Samples of

questionnaire

coding

Assign

tasks

Grade

109

questionnaire,

interview,

observation

7.3 Describe how to

design a

questionnaire and

coding schedule.

7.4 Explain the

difference between a

research interview

and other types of

interview e .g

journalistic interview

7.5 Explain how to

administer data

collection

instruments e.g.

questionnaire

7.6 Distinguish between

participants and non-

participant

observation

7.7 Explain the issues

involved in both e. g.

how to record data,

gain access

7.8 Design a simple

questionnaire

7.9 Administer the

questionnaire

data collection

instruments:

questionnaire,

coding schedule,

interview, guide

Explain question

and coding

schedule design

Explain how to

conduct a research

interview

Explain how to

administer a

questionnaire

difference

between

participant and

non-participant

observation

Explain how to

take notes during

an observation

study

and administer it

Distinguish between

participant and non-

participant observation,

and issues involved in

both

Design a questionnaire

and administer it

schedule

Books

Journals

Articles

Computers

scripts and

return

110

Give assignment

General Objectives 8.0: Know data processing

10 8.1 Define averages

8.2 Explain percentages

8.3 Explain measures of

central tendency e.g

mean, mode, median,

range and other

simple statistical

measures

8.4 Use simple statistical

measures in data

interpretation

8.5 Analyse various

types of data

Explain how to

organize research

data

Explain the use of

tables,

percentages

graphs, bar charts

etc

Deduce averages

percentages and

measures

Books

Journals

Articles

Computers

Assign

tasks

Grade

scripts and

return to

students

11 General Objectives 9.0: Know statistical measurements

7.1 Explain organization

of data

7.2 Explain grouping of

data

7.3 Explain tabulation of

Define

measurement

Explain average

Organize data

grouping of data

Explain tabulating of

Correctly plan

and model a

simple set

design for TV

programme.

Books

Research

reports

computers

with relevant

111

data

7.4 Analyse data

collected

7.5 Present the result of

the analysis

percentages

Explain measures

of central

tendency e. g

mean, mode,

range

Explain how to

use the statistical

measures to

interpret and

present data

data analyze and

present the result

software

General Objectives 10.0: Know how to write and research report

12-13 10.1Explain the general

format of a research

report

10.2Prepare and foreword

approval page title page

dedication

acknowledgement table

of Contents List of

illustrations e.g. picture,

abbreviation, table,

figure introduction arms

and objectives

limitations and

delineation main texts

Recommendations and

conclusions. The

Explain the

organization of

research report

Explain the

importance of each

component of the

report

Explain chapter and

chapter titles

Explain the

differences between

summary,

recommendation and

NA

Books

Research

reports

Books

Research

documents

Give group

and

industrial

assignments

Grade

scripts and

return

112

Appendix glossary

Bibliography/reference.

10.3Explain how to use

quotations in the text

10.4Explain the use of

footnotes and

bibliography

10.5Explain how to write

footnotes and

bibliography

10.6Outline the use of

abbreviation in citation

10.7Explain referencing and

citation styles

conclusion

Explain how to use

quotations in the text

Explain the use of

footnotes and

bibliography

Explain how to write

footnotes and

bibliography

Outline the use of

abbreviation in

citation

Explain referencing

and citation styles

Books

Research

documents

14 General Objectives 11.0:

11.1 Define Ethics

11.2 Explain plagiarism

11.3 Describe how a

researcher can

knowingly or

unknowingly plagiarise

Define ethics

Explain the role of

ethics

Explain ethical issues

in research e.g.

plagiarism, copyright

NA Books

Articles

Research

documents etc.

113

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS COMMUNICATION

COURSE COPY EDITING

COURSE CODE: MAC 213

DURATION: 3 HOURS/WEEK

GOAL: The course is designed to enable the student acquire the knowledge and skill of editing in processing news,

features and programme scripts for both the print and electronic media.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the student should:

1.0 Understand what copy (text) editing means.

2.0 Appreciate the need for copy editing.

3.0 Know how to use the computer for copying editing

4.0 Know varieties of copy editing/house styles of media organizations

5.0 Know how to edit stories/articles (copies)

ND1 SECOND SEMESTER

114

Course: COPY EDITING

Course Code: MAC 213 Contact Hours/credit unit:3

Course Specification Theoretical: hours/week

YEAR: ND SEMESTER: PRE-REQUISITE: PRACTICAL: hours/week

THEORETICAL CONTENT PRACTICAL CONTENT

General Objective 1.0:Understand what copy (text) editing means

Week/s Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher’s

activities

Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher’s

activities

Resources

(Theoretical

practical)

Evaluation

1-2 1.1 Explain copy/sources of

raw materials for copy.

1.2 Define editing – text

editing.

1.3 Explain the position

and role of a copyeditor.

1.4 Identify the position of

the copy (news) editor in

relation to others

in the production

process.

Explain copy, list

sources of raw

materials for copy-

news releases,

interviews, speeches

transcription from

monitored events on

radio and TV

programmes,

covered news

events

Enumerate how to

get a copy out of the

raw material

Search for

sources of raw

materials for

copy-news

releases,

interviews,

speeches

transcription from

monitored events

on radio and TV

programmes,

covered news

events

Lead students

to source for

raw materials

for copy-news

releases,

interviews,

speeches

Transcription

from

monitored

events on

radio and TV

programmes,

covered news

events.

Copies of

news

releases,

speeches,

radio cassette

recorder

with

cassettes,

television

monitors

with video

cassette‟s

and /or VCD

etc.

What are

the sources

of raw

materials

for copy-

news

releases,

interviews,

speeches

-

transcriptio

n from

monitored

events on

radio and

TV

115

1.5 Describe the process of

copy editing – how the

editor works.

Explain the

functions of a copy

editor.

transcription from

monitored events

on radio and TV

programmes,

covered news

events

transcription from

monitored events

on radio and TV

programmes,

covered news

events

transcription from

monitored events

on radio and TV

programmes,

covered news

events.

transcription

from

monitored

events on

radio and TV

programmes,

covered news

events

programme

s, covered

news

events

116

General Objectives 2.0: Appreciate the need for copy editing

Week/

s

Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher’s

activities

Specific

Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’s

activities

Resources

(Theoretical

/ practical)

Evaluation

3-5 2.1 Explain what copy

editing entails e.g

correcting factual and/or

grammatical errors,

errors of expression,

eliminating legal „trouble

spots‟ like label, slander,

marking copies for

printers, writing

headlines and sub heads.

2.2 Identify areas of

common errors in

writing e.g. preposition,

agreement of verbs with

subjects‟ relation of

pronoun to antecedents,

position of participles in

relation to the words they

modify, use of

punctuations.

2.3 Enumerate qualities of a

good copy editor e.g.

i. List out and

explain the

various

activities,

carried out in

copy editing

like correcting

errors of

grammar fact

and

expression

eliminating

legal trouble

spots such as

label, slander,

marking

copies for

printers,

writing

headlines and

sub heads.

ii. Show

common

errors in

Correct common

errors

transcription

Guide

students to

practice how

to identify

and

eliminate/corr

ect errors

Guide

students to

practice how

to identify

and

eliminate/corr

ect errors

Text books

Newspaper

Magazines

Text books

Newspaper

Magazines

Text books

Write out

common

errors in a

given passage

e.g.

preposition,

agreement of

verbs with

subjects,

relation of

pronoun to

antecedents,

position of

participles in

relation to the

words they

modify,

Give and

117

qualities of sympathy,

insight imagination,

balanced mind, ability to

work under pressure,

good command of the

language

2.4 Explain the concepts of

accuracy, conciseness,

coherence, clarity and

simplicity in editing.

2.5 Carry out assignments

on copy editing.

2.6 Carry out assignments

on copy editing.

.

writing e.g.

remuration‟

instead of

„remuneration

to enable him

to do it instead

of doing it,

converge on/at

rather than

converge in.

iii. Give and

grade several

assignments

on listing of

common

writing errors.

iv. Give and

grade

assignments

on

identification

of common

errors from

copies.

v. Highlight and

correct

identified

mistakes.

vi. Explain the

qualities of a

from monitored

events on radio

and TV

programmes,

covered news

events

transcription

from monitored

events on radio

and TV

programmes,

covered news

events

Newspaper

Magazines

grade

assignments

on qualities

of a good

copy editor

e.g. qualities

of sympathy,

insight

imagination,

balanced

mind, ability

to work

under

pressure,

good

command of

the language

118

good copy

editor

(deskman) e.g.

balanced

mind,

imagination,

cool

headedness

under

pressure, good

sense of

judgment,

good

command of

the language,

team spirit.

vii. Explain the

concepts of

accuracy,

coherence,

Coherence,

clarity and

simplicity in

editing.

General Objectives: 3.0 Know how to use the computer to edit copy

119

Week/s Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher’s

activities

Specific

Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’s

activities

Resources

(Theoretical

practical)

Evaluatio

n

6-7 3.1 Identify standard

editing symbols/marks

3.2 Explain the meaning

of the editing

symbols/marks

3.3 Reproducing the

editing symbols with

their meaning.

3.4 Identify relevant

software for copy

editing

3.5 Identify appropriate

computer editing tools

for copy editing.

3.6 Use the computer

editing tools to edit

copies.

identified areas of

mistakes

correct areas of

mistakes

Explain standard

editing symbols as

they appear on the

computer.

See standard

editing

symbols/marks

See computer

editing symbols

and their meaning

Use computer

editing tools to

edit copies

Guide the

students

identify

standard

editing

symbols/ma

rks in the

computer

and relevant

software for

copy editing

1) Textbooks

2) Newspaper

s

3) Magazines

General Objective 4.0: Know varieties of copy editing house styles of different media organizations

8-10 4.1 Identify media

organizations involved

in use of editing

symbols, e.g

i. Explain the

types of

organizations

involved in

Distinguish

between the

observed house

styles

Guide students

in

understanding

House styles

Textbooks

Media

organizatio

ns

List media

organizatio

ns involved

in use of

120

newspaper, magazine,

Radio, TV, Book

publishing firms.

4.2 Identify such media

organizations around

the locality of the

institution.

4.3 Explain the copy-

editing styles of each

organization

4.4 Compare each

organization‟s style

with others.

employing the

use of editing

symbols.

ii. Introduce

student to

workspace

iii. Give and grade

several

assignments

iv. Correct

identified areas

of mistakes

v. Demonstrate the

use of various

computer editing

tools.

vi. . Correct

identified

mistake.

Identify the work

space

Visits to

organizations to

know their

editing house

style.

Compare one

house style with

another

during visits to

various

organizations

Arrange visits

to such

organizations

to know their

editing house

styles.

Compare one

house style

with another

editing

symbols e.g

newspaper,

magazine,

Radio, TV,

Book

publishing

firms

General Objective 5.0: Know how to edit stories (copies)

121

11-14 5.1 Practice editing skills.

5.2 Edit stories (copies)

for newspapers,

magazines, radio,

and television stations.

i. Give and grade

copy editing

assignments.

ii. Give and grade

copy editing

assignments for

each medium

Practice editing

skills.

Edit stories

(copies) for

newspapers,

magazines, radio,

and television

stations

Correct

identified

mistakes by

practicing

editing skills

for news

papers,

magazines

and the

broadcast

stations

Supervise

students in

Practicing

editing skills.

Edit stories

(copies) for

newspaper,

magazines,

radio, and

television

stations

Notebooks

Computers

Textbooks

Newspapers

Magazines

and other

working

materials

Practice

editing

skills

122

Department/ Programme:

NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS

COMMUNICATION

Course Code:

MAC 214

Contact Hours/credit unit:

Subject/Course: FEATURE

WRITING

DURATION: 3

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE: 1ST

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours/week

Year: 2 Semester: 1

ST Pre-requisite: Practical: hours /week 2

UNITS

GOAL: This course is designed to enable the student acquire the skills for writing publishable feature articles for

newspapers and magazines

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the student should:

1.0 Understand the role of feature articles in journalism.

2.0 Know the difference between a feature article and other types of materials in the mass media

3.0 Know the stages in writing feature articles.

4.0 Know the art of writing feature articles.

5.0 State styles in feature article writing.

6.0 Understand how to illustrate a feature article.

7.0 Know the importance of research in feature writing.

123

Course: FEATURE WRITING Course Code:

MAC 214

Contact Hours: 3

Course Specification: THEORY PRACTICAL Theoretical: hours/week

Year: ND SEMESTER: Pre-requisite: Practical Content 2 HOURS/WEEK

THEORETICAL CONTENT PRACTICAL CONTENT

General Objective1.0: Understand the role of feature articles in journalism

Weeks Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher’s activities

Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher’s

activities

Resources

(Theoretical

/Practical)

Quiz

1-2 1.1 Enumerate the role of

feature articles

1.2 Describe a feature

article.

1.3 Identify the parts of a

feature article

Identify the relationship

between features and news.

Explain different types of

features articles

Explain the nature,

purpose and function

of a feature article.

Use various feature

articles to explain

parts and

characteristics of

features.

Using news stories

demonstrate the

difference between

news and feature and

explain the

relationship between

Practical not

required

Practical not

required

None

Textbooks

Newspapers

Magazines

Quiz

124

the two.

Using different types

of features from

newspapers and

magazine, explain

the differences

between expository,

descriptive,

narrative and

analytical

Textbooks

Newspapers

Magazines

Quiz

125

Week General Objective 2.0: Know the differences between features and other materials in the newspaper

3-4

2.1 Distinguish the

characteristics of feature

from other materials -

news, editorials,

column, supplements

etc.

2.2 Identify the place of the

feature desk in the

editorial department

- With the aid of

different editorial

materials, explain

the differences

between them

and features.

- Using a

newspaper

organogram

identify the

features desk in

the editorial dept.

See Editorial

materials,

Show the

differences

between them and

features

Using a

newspaper

organogram draw

the features desk

in the editorial

department

Guide students

to See Editorial

materials,

Show the

differences

between them

and features

Using a

newspaper

organogram,

draw the

features desk in

the editorial

department

Flipchart,

board

Showing,

the

organogr

am

Assignmen

t on

drawing

an

organogra

m to show

the

features

desk in the

editorial

departmen

t Guide

and return

to

students.

Week General Objective 3.0: Understand the stages in writing features

5-6 3.1 Describe how to

conceive feature ideas.

3.2 Identify the sources of

feature ideas.

Explain the sources

of feature ideas.

Explain how to keep

records of ideas and

process/develop

them.

Explain the purpose

Show the sources

of feature ideas.

See how to keep

records of ideas

and

process/develop

them.

Show the

sources of

feature ideas.

See how to keep

records of ideas

and

process/develop

Draft of

records

Textbook

s

Write in

detail to

Explain

how to

keep

records of

ideas and

process/de

velop

126

3.3 Describe how to draw

an outline

3.5 Describe how to

organize information/

3.6 materials gathered.

3.5 Describe the methods

of writing the article

of outline, how to

draw it, and

the different parts of

an outline.

Explain the methods

of organizing

information/material

gathered for a

feature article.

Describe various

methods of writing

a feature article, e.g.

chronological order,

anecdotal, climax,

anti-climax, logical

etc.

Draw up the

purpose of outline.

Draw the different

parts of an outline.

Show the methods

of organizing

information/materi

al gathered for a

feature article

Practice various

methods of

writing

a feature article

e.g. chronological

order, anecdotal,

climax, anti-

climax, logical

etc.

Draw up the

purpose of

outline.

Draw the

different parts

of an outline.

Show the

methods of

organizing

information/mate

rial gathered for

a

feature article

Practice

various methods

of writing

a feature article

e.g.

chronological

order,

anecdotal,

climax, anti-

climax, logical

etc.

Samples

of an

outline

them.

Grade the

assignment

s and

discuss

outline in

class with

students.

127

Week General Objectives: 4.0 Understand the art of feature writing

7-8 4.1 Explain the steps in

writing a feature.

4.2 Describe the parts of a

feature article.

4.3 Describe how to

coherently link these

parts.

4.4 Explain the devices

used in linking ideas.,

paragraphs.

4.5 Describe the qualities

of a good feature article.

4.6 Explain themes and

sub-themes in feature

articles writing. Write

at least two feature

articles

i. Explain the

steps in

writing a

feature.

ii. Explain the

transitional

devices.

iii. Describe the

qualities of a

good feature

article.

iv. Explain how

to develop

themes and

Sub-themes.

Practical not

required

Practice feature

writing

Guide students

to practice

feature writing

Books

Feature

Articles

from

Newspap

ers and

Magazine

s

What are

the steps

in writing

a feature ,

qualities of

a good

feature

article and

the

transitional

devices.

Week General Objective 5.0: Understand styles in feature article writing

9-10 5.1 Define style.

5.2 Compare different

writing styles. Write

i. Explain different

styles

ii. Use different

Practice different

writing styles.

Assign topics/

issues for

practice

Supervise

Articles

Sample

Assess and

Write

features

articles

128

features articles using

any of the different

styles.

feature articles to

illustrate different

styles

Write features

articles using any

of the different

styles.

student to

Practice writing

styles. Write

features articles

using any of the

different styles.

of

Magazine

s, News

papers

using any

of the

different

styles

129

Week General Objective 6.0; Understand how to illustrate a feature article

11-12 6.1 Describe the use of

pictures and other

illustrations in

features.

6.2 Describe how to use

other profiles – tables,

diagrams,

maps etc.

Explain the various

uses of illustrations

e.g. maps, pictures

etc.

See various

pictures and other

illustrations in

features.

Practice how to

use other profiles

– tables, diagrams,

maps etc.

Provide

students with

various pictures

and other

illustrations in

features to

Practice how to

illustrate e.g,

maps etc.

Articles

Samples

of

Magazine

s, New S

papers

Write

features

using

profiles,

tables,

diagrams

etc.

General Objective 7.0: Know the importance of research in feature writing

13-14 7.1 Define research.

7.2 Explain the process of

research in journalism.

7.3 Explain the sources of

materials, e.g.

documentation,

research, reports,

internet, interviews,

library.

7.4 Explain the importance

of research in feature

article writing. Write a

researched feature

article.

-Identify the sources

of materials and

information.

Give students

assignments/

exercise

Highlight errors,

strength and

weakness in the

assignment

Walk around to

see the source of

materials and

information.

Highlight errors,

strength and

weakness in a

given assignment

Take students

through the

practical to

source for

materials and

information.

Guide students

to

Highlight

errors, strength

and weakness in

a given

assignment

Books

Feature

articles

from

Newspap

ers and

Magazine

s

Highlight

errors,

strength

and

weakness

in the

assignment

130

Department/ Programme: NATIONAL

DIPLOMA IN MASS OMMUNICATION

Course Code:

MAC 215

Contact Hours/credit unit: 3

Subject/Course: MASS MEDIA & SOCIETY DURATION: 2

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE:

1ST

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours/week 2

Year: ND2 Semester:1ST Pre-requisite: Practical: 1 hours /week

GOAL: This course is designed to familiarise the student with the relationships which exist between the mass

media, government, and the society

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course the student should:

1.0 Understand the nature and scope of the relationships which exist between the mass media, government, and the

society

2.0 Understand the characteristics and development of the Nigerian mass media from 1859 to the present time

3.0 Understand the nature and structure of media ownership and control

4.0 Understand the nature and sources of media power in the society

5.0 Know the functions of the mass media in the society

6.0 Know the various pressures and influences on the mass media

7.0 Know the principles of press freedom

8.0 Understand the nature and functions of media regulatory agencies

131

Course: : MASS MEDIA AND SOCIETY Course Code: MAC 215 Contact Hours/credit unit 4:4

Course Specification: Theoretical: hours/week

Year: NDII Semester: Pre-requisite: - Practical: hours /week

THEORETICAL CONTENT PRACTICAL CONTENT

General Objective 1.0: Understand the nature and scope of the relationships which exist between the mass media

government and the society

Week Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's activities Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Resources

(Theoretica

l/Practical)

Evaluation

1-2 1.1 Explain the

normative

theories of the

press

1.2 Explain the

extent to which

the theories are

applicable to

Nigeria

1.3 Outline the

principles and

forms of state

control on the

media

i. Explain each

of the theories

and trace their

backgrounds

ii. Situate the

theories to

Nigeria and

explain the

extent of their

applicability

to the country

iii. Explain the

principles and

forms of state

control on the

mass media

Practical not

required

Textbooks

Journals

Newspapers

Magazines

Internet

What do you

understand by

normative

theories of the

press.

Outline the

principles and

forms of state

control on the

media

132

General Objective 2.0: Understand the characteristics and development of the Nigerian mass media from 1859 to

the present time

3-4 2.1 List the

important

landmarks in the

development of

the Nigeria mass

media

2.2 Describe the

characteristics of

the Nigeria

media

2.3 Evaluate the

major

contributions of

leading media

organs in the

development of

Nigeria

Identify some of the

important

landmarks in the

history of the mass

media in Nigeria

Describe the factors

that promoted the

development of new

media in Nigeria

Explain the major

contributions of the

various media

outlets to the

development of

Nigeria.

Practical not

required

Textbooks

Journals

Newspapers

Magazines

Internet

Write brief

history of

the mass

media in

Nigeria

General Objective 3.0: Understand the nature and structure of media ownership and control

5-6 3.1 Explain types of

media ownership

and control

3.2 Analyse the

nature and extent

of government

and private

ownership of the

media.

3.3 Compare and

i. Explain the

different types of

media ownership

and control in the

media industry

ii. Analyse the

nature and extent of

government and

private participation

in the ownership

Practical not

required

Textbooks

Journals

Newspapers

and

Magazines

Internet

Enumerate

types of

media

ownership

and control

in the media

industry

133

contrast patterns

of media

ownership in

Nigeria and

elsewhere in the

world (print and

broadcast)

and activities of the

mass media

Compare the system

of media ownership

and control in

Nigeria with what

obtains in other

countries whose

political systems are

differen from

Nigeria‟s

General Objective 4.0: Understand the nature and sources of media power in the society

7-8 4.1 Explain the

nature of media

power in society

4.2 Explain the

sources of media

power in society

(i.e structural,

psychological,

normative etc)

Explain the nature

of media strength

and legitimacy in

the society

Ii Explain the

various sources of

media power like

psychological,

structural and

normative, sources

in Nigeria

Practical not

required

Textbooks

Journals

Newspapers

Magazines

Internet

The

constitution

Internet

declaration

Enumerate

the

functions of

various

sources of

media

power such

as

psychologic

al, structural

and

normative,

sources in

Nigeria

General Objective 5.0: Know the functions of the mass media in the society

9 5.1 Explain the

functions of the

media in a

i. Explain the

functions of the

broadcast and print

Practical not

required

Textbooks

Journals

Newspapers

What are the

functions of

the

134

democracy

5.2 Analyse the

performance of the

media in a

divers/pluralistic

society such as

Nigeria

5.3 Analyse the

performance of the

media in Nigeria

media in a

democratic setting

ii. Explain the

operations and

performance of the

media in a diverse

society such as

Nigeria

iv. Illustrate with

examples

drawn from

colonial,

military and

civilians

regim

Practical not

required

and

Magazines

Internet

broadcast

and print

media in a

democratic

setting

General Objective 6.0: Know the various pressures and influences on the mass media

10-

11

6.1 Explain the

different

pressures, both

internal and

external, on the

media.

6.2 Compare the

situation in

Nigeria with

other countries

Explain the pressure

and influences -

external, internal

and institutional -

that impact on the

mass media in

Nigeria.

Compare Nigeria‟s

case with one or

two other countries

Practical not

required

Textbooks

Journals

Newspapers

Magazines

Internet

List the

pressure and

influences -

external,

internal, and

institutional

- that impact

on the mass

media in

Nigeria

General Objective 7.0: Know the principles of press freedom

12-

13

Define press

freedom

State the various

Explain the

concepts of press

freedom

Practical not

required

Textbooks

Journals

Newspapers

Describe the

social,

economic,

135

factors, which

characterize freedom

of the press

Identify

impendiments for

freedom of the press

in Nigeria

Analyse press

freedom in Nigeria

Explain the freedom

of information law

Explain the positions

of the freedom of

information law and

the constitutional

provisions

i. Describe the

social

economic,

political and

other factors

that

characterise

the existence

or absence of

freedom of

the press

ii. Identify the

various

obstacles and

constraints to

press freedom

iii. Iv. Explain

the state of

press freedom

in Nigeria

under various

regimes

Magazines

Internet

Copy of

FOIL

Copy of the

continuation

political and

other factors

that

characterse

the

existence or

absence of

freedom of

the press

General Objective 8.0: Understand the nature and functions of media regulatory agencies

14 8.1 Define

regulatory

agencies in the

media industry

8.2 Identify the

functions of

bodies like

Explain the concept

and philosophy of

regulation in the

media industry

Explain the

functions of these

Practical not

required

Textbooks

Journals

Newspapers

Magazines

Internet

Explain the

functions of

professional

bodies as

defined by

their

establishing

136

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS COMMUNICATION

COURSE TITLE: MASS COMMUNICATION ETHICS

COURSE CODE: MAC 216

DURATION: 2 HOURS/WEEKS

GOAL: This course is designed to acquaint the students with ethical in Mass Communication.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

0.0 Understand the meaning of Ethics

1.0 Know the background to development of Ethical theories and the growth of morality,

2.0 Analyze the various ethical factors or problems in Mass Communication

3.0 Understand the major ethical issues in Nigerian society generally

4.0 Understand the conventions guiding Journalist‟s disclosure of news sources.

Nigeria press

Council, National

Broadcasting

Commission

Adv(APCON NIPR

etc

Explain how the

activities of these

bodies affect

operations in the

media and society

bodies as defined by

their establishing

laws

Explain the

importance of each

of these bodies to

media operations

and societal interest

laws.

137

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

COURSE: PRINCIPLES OF PUBLIC RELATIONS COURSE CODE MAC 126 CONTRACT HOURS/CREDIT UNIT 2/

hrs/week 2

YEAR: ND 2 Semester: 1 Pre-requisite:

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THEORY

WEE

K

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 1.0 Understand the meaning of Ethics

THEORETICAL CONTENT PRACTICAL

CONTENT

1-4 Specific Learning Objective Teacher Activities Specific

Learning

Objective

Teacher Activities Resources Evaluation

1.1 Define Ethics

1.2 Identify ethical theories

Textbooks

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 2.0 Know the background to development of Ethics I theories and the growth of morality.

5-7 2.1 Identify circumstances

under which a journalist

may be required to

reveal a source of

information

2.2 Explain penalties for a

journalist who withholds

a source of information

he has been asked to

reveal

Explain different

circumstances a

journalist may be

required to reveal

the source(s) of his

information

Explain penalties

for a journalists‟

refusal to reveal the

source of

information when

asked to do so.

Textbooks

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 3.0 Know the background to development of Ethical‟s theories and the growth of morality, including the idea of the

“Good Ethical‟

8-10 3.1 Define ethics and

Morality

3.2 Describe ethical theories

3.3 Compare and contrast

i. Explain ethics

and morality

ii. Describe ethical

theories

iii. Distinguish

Textbooks

138

ethical theories in terms

of their characteristics

and how they have

influenced moral

thoughts and beliefs

over time.

3.4 Examine the critical

factors which are

responsible for the

moral development of

the individual.

between ethical

theories, moral

thoughts and

beliefs.

iv. Enumerate the

factors

responsible for

the moral

development of

the individual.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 4.0 Analyze the various, factors and problems in Mass Communication

11-12 4.1 Analyze the moral

qualities which a

professional mass

communicator must

have as member of the

society

4.2 Explain the moral

qualities which a

professional mass

communicator must

exhibit in relationships

with news sources.

4.3 Explain the various

ethical issues, the

professional mass

communicator must

take into account in

information collection

4.4 Explain the ethical

issues, which govern the

i. Explain moral

qualities

expected from a

mass

communicator

and when to put

them into use

ii. Explain ethical

issues necessary

for effective

news gathering

by the mass

communicator

iii. Explain the

ethical issues

which should

from the basics

of the mass

communicator‟s

relationship with

all members of

the society.

Textbooks

139

construction and

publication of news and

other kinds of messages

4.5 Analyze the ethical

issues that come into

play in the

communicators

relationship with his

professional colleagues.

4.6 Analyze ethical issues in

the communicator‟s

relationship with his

employers and

employees

4.7 Analyze the ethical

factors governing the

relationship between

communicator and

audiences

4.8 Explain the ethical factors

governing the relationship

between mass media

institutions and other

organizations, including

government agencies and

officials.

4.9 Analyze the ethical issues

involved in the

relationship between

mass media organizations

140

and members of the

public

4.10 Explain the ethical factors

which a mass media

organization must take

into account in order to

maintain its viability as a

responsible institution in

the society

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 5.0 Understand the conventions guiding Journalist‟s disclosure of news sources.

13-14 5.1 Explain confidential

information

5.2 Describe circumstances

in which course can or

cannot restrain the

publication of

confidential information

i. Explain ethics

and morality

ii. Describe ethical

theories

iii. Distinguish

between ethical

theories moral

thoughts and

beliefs

iv. Enumerate the

factors

responsible for

the moral

development of

the individual.

Textbooks

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 5.0 Understand the major ethical issues in Nigerian society generally

4.1 Enumerate the various

ethical issues in Nigeria

4.2 Analyze the relative

importance of the ethical

issues influencing human

behavior and

i. Explain ethical

issues peculiar

to Nigerians

ii. Describe the

level to which

ethical issues

have assisted in

Textbooks

Journals

141

relationships in the

society

4.3 Analyze the extent to

which ethical issues have

contributed to the

molding the

contemponent Nigeria

Society

4.4 Explain how general

ethical issues in the

country are related to

ethical issue in specific

fields of human

endeavour, including

mass communications.

4.5 Explain how ethical

problems in Nigeria can

be resolved

4.6 State how high ethical

standards can be

maintained in Nigeria.

the moral

development of

the Nigerian

society

iii. Describe how

ethical standards

can be further

enhanced in

Nigeria

iv. Describe the

various ways in

which thorough

professional

training, good

salary and good

conditions of

service can be

used to maintain

and sustain high

ethical

standards.

v. Enumerate some

high standards

of ethical

performance in

mass

communication

142

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS COMMUNICATION

COURSE TITLE: BROADCAST PRODUCTION 1

COURSE CODE: MAC 217

DURATION: 3 HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE: 1st SEMESTER

GOAL: The course is designed to introduce the student to the skills necessary for radio/television productions. It also

aims at enabling the student to acquire some basic proficiency in interviewing, presenting, scripting and

programme directing.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

1.0 Understand the process of broadcast production

2.0 Understand the responsibilities and functions of a broadcast Production team

3.0 Understand the technical aspects of radio/tv production

4.0 Know the different types of programme

5.0 Understand the languages of radio/television directing

6.0 Understand the legal aspects and implications of production

7.0 Know how to prepare scripts for radio/television production

8.0 Know the basic production techniques of different programmes

9.0 Know the professional and ethical codes.

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS COMMUNICATION

COURSE: BROADCAST PRODUCTION 1 COURSE CODE MAC 217 CONTACT HOURS/CREDIT UNIT

143

3/ hrs/week 2

YEAR: ND 2 Semester: 1 Pre-requisite: Practical/hours/week

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THEORY Practical Content

WEE

K

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 1.0 Identify the stages in broadcast production

THEORETICAL CONTENT

PRACTICAL

CONTENT

Specific Learning OBJECTIVE Teacher Activities Specific Learning

Objective

Teacher Activities Resources Evaluation

1-2 1.1 Explain the process of

radio programme

production

1.2 Explain the process of

TV programme

production

1.3 Describe the functions of

operators in a radio/tv

production

Intimate students

with the major

phases involved in

programmes

production.

Textbooks

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 2.0 Understand the responsibilities and functions of a broadcast Production team

3

2.1 Explain the

responsibilities of the

production team

2.2 List the members of a

typical radio/tv

production team and

Explain their functions.

List out the

functions of the

production team

Enumerate

members of a

typical radio/tv

production team

and highlight their

functions.

Textbooks

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 3.0 Understand the technical aspects of radio/tv production

4-5 3.1 Identify the different

types of microphones

and their uses

3.2 Describe

Explain different

types of

microphones and

their uses

Explain the

Uni-

directional,

bidirectional ,

and omni

directional

144

audio recording

equipment and explain

the recording process for

radio/tv

3.3. Explain the types and

functions of tv cameras

3.4 List major radio/tv

production requirements

and facilities

3.5 Explain a typical radio/tv

studio and control room

procedures.

3.6 Describe the audio/video

consoles and explain their

operations

3.7 Explain the need for

acoustics in audio

production.

3.8 Explain the need for

lighting in tv production

3.9 Explain the use of

special effects in

Audio/video production.

recording process

for audio and video

Arrange a visit to a

typical radio/tv

station

Describe

audio/video

recording

equipment.

mics, lapel,

boom,shot-

gun mics

Audio Digital

Recording

devices

StudioDigital

video cam

Floor

monitor(s)

Teleprompter

Computers

(Laptops)

Audio and

video

console,

studio

memory

storage

devices.

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 4.0 Know the different types of programme

6-7 4.1 Identify and explain the

different programme

types

4.2 State the objectives of

Explain the

different

programme types

Explain the

Textbooks

Administrativ

e manual of a

typical

145

each programme types

4.3 Describe the concept of

time-belt in

programming

objectives of each

programme type

and the concept of

time –belt in

programming.

Radio/TV

station.

Programme

schedule of a

typical

Radio/TV

station.

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 5.0 Understand the languages of radio/television directing

8 5.1 Give a list of vocabulary

on the basic terminology

used in radio/tv

production

5.2 Demonstrate radio/tv

cues and Hand signals

5.3 Explain camera operation

and basic shots

Explain vocabulary

on the basic

terminology used

in radio/tv

productions

Demonstrate

Radio/Tv hand

signals

Textbooks

Visit to

typical

radio/TV

station

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 6.0 Understand the legal aspects and implications of production

9 6.1 Explain copyright

clearances, fees, unions,

libel, slander, treason

etc.

Explain copyright

clearances, fees,

unions, libel,

slander, treason etc.

Copyright

Law

Law books

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 7.0 Know how to Prepare Scripts for Radio/Tv Production

10-11 7.1 Explain the need for

scripting in radio/tv

productions.

7.2 List the different types

of scripts needed in

radio/tv and their

formats

Describe the need

for scripting on

radio/tv

productions. List

the different types

of scripts needed

on radio/tv and

their formats

Explain the

Textbooks

Typical R/Tv

script

Write different

types of R/Tv

scripts

Guide the

students on

how to write

good R/Tv

scripts.

Evaluate

and

correct

the scripts

146

7.3 Explain the difference

between radio and tv

scripts.

difference between

radio/tv scripts

Give out

assignments on any

of the programme

types.

Evaluate the

assignment

Call for a

correction- session

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 8.0 Know the basic production techniques of different programmes

12- 8.1 Explain what to do in

preparing for a

programme in the area

of news

8.2 Explain what to know

on programmes

presentation and

arrange for class

demonstration of a

particular programme.

8.3 Explain the activities

involved in post

production

8.3 Explain the editing

process and suites.

Explain what to do

in preparing for a

programme in the

area of news

Explain what to

know on

programmes

presentation and

arrange for class

demonstration of a

particular

programme

Divide the class

into groups and let

the students

produce different

programme types

Assess the

productions

Arrange for

correction-sessions

Typical

Radio/TV

studio

Editing Suites

Divide class

into groups for

practical

exercises

Guide the

students to

Produce and

edit different

programme

types

Grade the

practical

exercises

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 9.0 Know the professional and ethical codes.

13-14 9.1 Explain professional code

of practice

i. Describe

professional Textbooks

Nigeria

147

9.2 Explain some of the

ethics expected of a

professional broadcaster

code of practice

ii. Explain some

of the ethics

expected of a

professional

broadcaster.

Broadcasting

code

African

charter on

Broadcasting

Article 19

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS COMMUNICATUION

COURSE TITLE: SPEECH COMMUNICATION

COURSE CODE: MAC 222

DURATION: 2 HOURS/WEEKS

GOAL: This course is designed to familiarize the students with the theories, procedures and practice of effective speech

communication.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

0.0 Know the classical theory of rhetoric‟s

1.0 Know how to judge a speech

2.0 Know how to analyze the audience and speaking occasion

3.0 Know how to select a speech subject and purpose

4.0 Understand speech organization and composition

5.0 Know the basic sounds of speech

6.0 Know how to pronounce correctly

7.0 Know how to develop effective speaking voice

8.0 Know the principles of effective delivery

148

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

COURSE: SPEECH COMMUNICATION COURSE CODE CONTACT HOURS/CREDIT UNIT 2/

hrs/week 2

YEAR: Semester: 2 Pre-requisite:

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THEORY

WEE

K

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: Know the classical theory of rhetorics

1-2 THEORETICAL CONTENT

PRACTICAL

CONTENT

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher Activities Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Resources Evaluation

1.1 Define rhetorics

1.2 Explain the sophist theory

1.3 Explain the “knowledge

is eloquent‟ theory

1.4 Explain the “able man‟s

theory.”

1.5 Explain the “methods

theory”.

Explain the

theories of rhetoric,

sophist, knowledge

is eloquent, able

man and method

theory

Textbooks Assign

speech

exercises,

grade and

return to

students

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 2.0 Know how to judge a speech

3-4 2.1 Explain oral

Communication

2.2 Identify the criteria for

Judging a speech

2.3 Explain the steps in speech

development

Enumerate oral

communication

steps, speech

development

Textbooks

149

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 3.0 Know how to analyze the audience and speaking occasion

5 3.1 Explain the importance

of Audience analysis

3.2 Explain how to analyze

an audience

3.3 Explain how to analyze

the occasion

3.4 Analyze an audience and

speaking occasion

Explain the

importance of

audience analysis

and how to analyze

audience

Textbooks

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 4.0 Know how to select a speech subject and purpose

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 5.0 Understand speech organization and composition

6-7 5.1 Explain types of speech

composition i.e

argumentative,

descriptive, narrative

and expository

5.2 Explain how to

effectively introduce a

speech

5.3 Explain the sequence of

an effective speech

5.4 Explain the value of an

effective introduction

and conclusion

5.5 Carry out the various

Types of speech bearing

in mind 62-4

i. Enumerate

types of speech

composition i.e

argumentative,

descriptive,

narrative and

expository

ii. Demonstrate

effective intro

and sequencing

and conclusion

of a speech

Textbooks

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 6.0 Know the basic sounds of speech

150

8-9 6.1 Identify consonant

sounds

6.2 Identify vowel sounds

6.3 Identify diphthongs

6.4 Identify the phonemes

of the English Lang

6.5 Write symbols from

sounds

6.6 Produce sounds from

Symbols

i. Explain

consonant

sounds, vowel

sounds,

diphthongs,

phonemes

ii. Demonstrate

how to write

symbols from

sounds

iii. Demonstrate

how to produce

sounds from

symbols

Textbooks

Radio/Cassett

e Player

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 7.0 Know how to pronounce correctly

10 7.1 Explain the received

pronunciation model

7.2 Pronounce smoothly

without hesitation

7.3 Use the tone of the

voice correctly

7.4 Use melody in speech

appropriately

7.5 Stress words correctly

7.6 Pronounce words and

sentence using the

proper inflection,

rhythm, tone etc.

i. Explain with

diagram,

pronunciation

model

ii. Demonstrate

how to

pronounce

smoothly

without

hesitation,

correct use of

tone of the

voice,

appropriate use

of melody and

stress words

correctly

iii. Give and grade

assignments on

Radio/Cassett

e Player

Language

lab.

151

(i) and

(ii)above

iv. Correct

identified area

of

pronunciation.

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 8.0 Know how to develop effective speaking voice

11-12 8.1 Explain the requisites

for an effective

speaking voice

8.2 Explain how to vary the

voice

8.3 Explain the process of

voice development

8.4 Use variety in vocal

Utterances

8.5 Use acceptable

pronunciation

i. Enumerate

requisites for

effective

speaking voice

e.g avoid

smoking avoid

taking cold

water before

presenting

speech etc.

ii. Demonstrate

how to vary

voice

iii. Enumerate

voice

development

process

iv. Demonstrate

variety in vocal

utterances and

acceptable

pronunciation.

Radio Cassette

player set Listen to

students‟

delivery

revaluate

vocalization

Evaluate

voice delivery

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 9.0 Know the principles of effective delivery

13-14 9.1 Identify different types

of delivery e.g

impromptu,

extemporaneous and

written

Explain and

demonstrate

different types

of delivery e.g.

impromptu,

Organize

speech

occasions,

observe

student‟s

Textbooks

Copies of

speeches of

history

Radio/cassett

152

9.2 Explain how to develop

confidence

9.3 Explain proper stage

conduct i.e eye-contact,

gesticulation, articulation,

enunciation etc.

9.4 Analyze at least five great

speeches of history

9.5 State the merits of the

speeches in 4.4 above

Practice Martin Luther king

(Junior) style of delivery.

extemporaneou

s and written

Describe and

show how to

develop poise

and confidence

Describe and

show to

conduct self on

stage

Show copies of

great speeches

like Martin

Luther king

(junior) speech.

“I have a

Dream”

Explain how to

analyze such

speeches

Demonstrate

how to analyze

such speeches

Highlight the

merits of the

speeches

analyzed

performance

judge

e set.

153

Course: NEWSPAPER AND

MAGAZING

PRODUCTION

Course Code:MAC 223 Contact Hours/credit unit:

Theoretical: 2 hours/week3

Year:

Semester:ND

Pre-requisite: Practical: 1 hours /week

General Objective 1:

Theoretical content Practical Content

Week/s Specific Learning Outcomes

Teacher’s activities Specific Learning

Outcomes Teacher’s

activities

Resources

(Theoretical

/

practical)

Evaluation

1 -2

1.1 Define a newspaper and

magazine

1.2 Explain the features of a

newspaper and a magazine.

1.3 List the major divisions in

a newspaper and magazine

i Explain the meaning

of a newspaper and

magazine.

ii Describe an outline of a

newspaper and magazine

and state their types.

Design

Organization

outline

difference

design and

layouts

Identify proof

reading symbol

Demonstrate

preparation of

dummy sheets

visit newsstand

Guide

students

to

illustrate

organogra

m, design

layout,

special

device in

make up

and

Textboo

ks

Newspa

pers and

Magazin

es

Organog

ram of a

typical

magazin

e or

newspap

Produce

a

newspap

er and

magazin

e and

circulate

Assess

Reports

from

field

trips/visi

154

organization.

1.4 Identify the roles and

functions of principal officers

of a newspaper and magazine

house.

iii Explain the

characteristics of a

newspaper and a

magazine.

iv Explain the functions

of principal officers of a

newspaper and magazine

house

stages in

printing

process

Guide

students

illustrate

editing

process

preparatio

n of

dummy

sheets

plage

planning

show

printing

materials

Monitor

students

visit

er house t

General Objective 2: Understand the design and make-up of a newspaper and a magazine

3-4

2.1 Describe the pages and

pagination of the newspaper

2.2 Explain space budgeting in

i. Explain the

meaning of

design and

layout and how

they are

applied in

Identify

elements of a

pages conduct

facility tours

Specify special

device in make-

Produce a

newspaper

and magazine

and circulate

Textboo

ks

Newspa

pers and

Magazin

es

155

a newspaper.

newspaper and

manazine page

planning.

ii. Explain the

elements of a

page i.e text,

headlines,

photo and

advert.

up the stages of

the printing

processes

layout

sheets

Comput

ers

(with

relevant

software

s)

5-7

2.3 Describe the design and

layout practices in newspaper

and magazine production e.g

balance, rhythm, unity,

contrast, harmony etc.

2.4 Explain the elements of a

page e.g. text, photo, advert

and headlines.

Describe the design and

layout practices in

newspaper and magazine

production e.g balance,

rhythm, unity, contrast,

harmony.

Explain the elements of a

page e.g. text, photo,

advert and headlines.

Describe the

design and

layout

practices in

newspaper

and

magazine

production

e.g balance,

rhythm,

unity,

contrast,

harmony

2.5 Explain special devices in

magazine make-up indenting,

Explain special devices in

magazine make-up

Explain

special

devices in

magazine

make-up

156

bastardization, etc.

2.6 Explain the design of a

newspaper page e.g. vertical,

horizontal and modern.

indenting, bastardization,

etc.

Explain the design of a

newspaper page e.g.

vertical, horizontal and

modern

indenting,

bastardizatio

n, etc

General Objective 3: Know various techniques for newspapaper

8-9

3.1Explain printing: web, off-

set colour separation, gravure

printing etc.

.i. Explain each of the

various modes of printing

i.e. letter press web-off set

etc

ii Conduct an academic

visit to different printing

houses for practical

explanations on each of

the printing mode and

facility i.e. newspapaer

printing house.

Newspa

per and

Magazin

e.

Facility

tour of

printing

press

.

General Objective 4: Know the stages involved in the production of a newspaper and magazine

157

10-11

1.2 Explain editing,

typesetting, layout sheets

and proof reading

4.2 Explain the materials used

in printing i.e. films, plates,

ink, photographs etc.

i. Describe the

processes of

editing designing

layout sheets,

typesetting, proof

reading.

ii. Explain use of

computer in those

processes.

iii. Explain the

individual steps

and materials

required for the

printing of: a

black and white

and a colour

newspaper and

magazine

Textboo

ks

Newspa

per and

Magazin

es

Plates,

films,

and

dummy

sheets

and

newspri

nts

Comput

er with

at least

2

Printers

General Objective 5: Understand how to circulate and market a newspaper and magazine

12-13

5.1 List the methods of newspaper and

magazine circulation.

5.2Explain the distribution and

marketing of newspaper and

magazines

i Explain the pattern of

newspaper and magazine

distribution in Nigeria.

ii Distinguish the market

of newspaper and

magazine in Nigeria

Textbook

s

Newspap

er and

magazine

Internet.

158

iii Explain the problems of

newspaper and magazine

distribution and marketing

i.e. transportation, unsold

copies remittances, etc

5.3 Distinguish the market for

newspaper and magazine

General Objective 6: Understand

the future of the print media in

the context of changing economy,

technology and society

14

6.1 Outline how changes in technology

affect the processes of newspaper and

magazine production

6.2 Outline how changes in the

economy affect the newspaper and

magazine business.

6.3 Analyse how social, economic and

political factors affect the print media.

i Explain the various

changes in technology and

demonstrate how they

have affected the

production of newspaper

and magazine.

ii Examine the

implications of the

changes in the economy on

the newspaper and

magazine business.

Textbook

s

159

iii Explain the extent to

which political and social

factors in the society

impact on the operations

of the print media

160

Department/ Programme: NATIONAL

DIPLOMA IN MASS COMMUNICATION

Course Code:

MAC 224

Contact Hours: 3

Subject/Course: PHOTOGRAPHY AND

PHOTO JOURNALISM

DUCATION: 4

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE:

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours/week

2

Year: ND2 Semester: 1st Pre-requisite: Practical: 1 hours /week

GOAL: The course is designed to give the students knowledge of photography, process of photo production and use

of the camera.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course the student should:

1.0 Know the history of photography.

2.0 Know the types and parts as well as models of cameras.

3.0 Understand the photographic process.

4.0 Know camera manipulation

5.0 Know darkroom procedure

161

Course: : PHOTOGRAPHY AND PHOTO JOURNALISM

Course Code:

MAC 224

Contact

Hours: 3

Course Specification: THEORY/PRACTICAL

1- Year: ND 2 Pre-requisite: - N/A Practical: hours /week

Theoretical Content Practical Content N/A

General Objective 1.0: Know the history of photography

Week/s Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher‟s activities Resources

(Theoretical/

practical)

Specific Learning

Outcomes

Teacher‟s

activities

Evaluation

1-3 1.1 Trace the evolution of

Photographing.

1.2 Describe the development

of the camera.

1.3 Explain use of

photography.

1.4 Highlight the development

of photography in Nigeria.

X-ray the use of

photographs in the mass

media.

iv. Explain the

development of the

camera and

Photography.

v. Explain the use of

photography in

Newspaper/Magazi

ne production.

Textbooks

Cameras

Newspaper/Maga

zine

Camera

Computer

Color printer

Scanner

Differentiate

between types of

cameras

Identify lenses

Recognize

different

functions of the

parts of the

camera

Classify

characteristics of

light

Demonstrate

effects of lights

Guide

students

through

specific

learning

outcomes

Guide

students to

take action

pictures

162

on exposure

163

General Objective: 2.0 Know the types and parts as well as models of cameras.

4-6 2.1 Identify different types of

cameras.

2.2 Identify different camera

models.

2.3 Identify the parts of a

camera.

2.4 Explain the functions of

the parts of the camera.

i. Describe the

parts of a

camera.

ii. Explain types

and models of

camera.

iii. Explain the

functions of the

parts of camera.

Numbers of

35mm

photographic

cameras with

lens Wide-Normal

zoom

Normal-long

zoom. Telephoto

zoom

Demonstrate

various camera

settings

Identify picture

composition

elements

Digital Single

Lens Reflex

(DSLR)

General Objectives: 3.0 Understand the photographic process

7-9 3.1 Explain the nature of light.

3.2 Analyze basic principles

of light.

3.3 Explain what happens

when objects are moved

closer or farther away from

the source of light i.e

illumination, fall-off.

3.4 Describe the changes that

take place when light

meets a surface.

3.5 Explain what happens

when light passes through

a camera lens.

3.6 Describe the photographic

i. Explain basic

principles and nature

of light.

ii. Describe effects on

objects when moved

closer and farther

away the source of

light.

iii. Explain in general

the role of light in

photography.

iv. Demonstrate in

depth the

photographic

process.

v. Demonstrate effects

of light on exposure.

Textbooks

Cameras

Printers

Computer with

software

164

process.

3.7 Explain how light affect

exposure

165

General Objectives: 4.0 Know camera manipulation

10-11 4.1 Explain focal length and

shutter speed setting.

4.2 Explain the nature

elements of composition

4.3 Explain the elements of

picture composition take

pictures that tell stories

Explain lighting system

in photography.

Demonstrate the

process involved in

printing/display of

photograph.

Cameras

and white

processing

42 color printers

(300dpi)

4 photo studio

lights

General Objectives: 5.0 Know dark room procedure

12-13 5.1 Explain darkroom

procedure.

5.2 Mix the chemical

solutions, developer and

fixer (hypo)

5.3 Test solutions for

appropriate temperature.

5.4 Develop films and print

photographs.

5.5 Dry and trim prints to

appropriate sizes

i. Explain procedures

in the darkroom.

ii. Describe and show

how chemical

solutions are mixed.

iii. Explain appropriate

focal setting and

shutter speed.

iv. Show how to

develop film print,

dry and trim to size.

v. Demonstrate and

show how to test

solution, for

required

temperature.

vi. Give assignments

Camera

Photo papers

Photo enlarger

Paper shearing

machine

Developer, fixer,

time, scissors,

washing basins,

thermometers,

developing tanks

General Objective: 6.0 Know how to communicate with photographs

14 6.1 Select successful prints and

arrange them in order of

sharpness.

i. Explain how to

sort out good

prints.

ii. Explain why a

Photo albums

Scissors

machine

Newspapers and

166

6.2 Select the print most

suitable for a particular

story.

6.3 Crop, scale and caption.

print is

preferable to the

other in story.

iii. Describe how to

crop, scale write

caption.

Magazine

Scanners

167

PROGRAMME: MASS COMMUNICATION

COURSE TITLE: BROADCAST PRODUCTION II

COURSE CODE: 225

DURATION: 3 HOURS/WEEKS

GOAL: This course is designed as a follow-up to broadcast production 1, and is aimed at giving the students the necessary

skills for producing basic radio and television programme

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

1.0 Know how to plan a basic radio and television programme

2.0 Know how to prepare scripts for radio and television programme

3.0 Know how to present programmes for radio and television

4.0 Know how to produce and direct programmes for radio and television

5.0 Know how to handle outside broadcast

6.0 Know how to put finishing touches on produced programmes for television and radio

7.0 Understand audiences research techniques.

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

COURSE: BROADCAST PRODUCTION II COURSE CODE MAC 225 CONTRACT HOURS/CREDIT UNIT 3/

hrs/week 2

YEAR: 400 Semester: 2ND

Pre-requisite:

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THEORY

WEE

K

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 1.0 Know how to plan a basic radio and television programme

THEORETICAL CONTENT

PRACTICAL

CONTENT

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher Activities Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Resources Evaluation

168

1-2 1.1 Conceptualise a

programme bearing in

mind a specific message

1.2 Determine the audience

1.3 Establish the production

elements an limitations

1.4 Hunt for appropriate

talents

1.5 Establish appropriate

venue or location for

outside production

1.6 Make an appropriate

budget for production

- Explain how to

conceptualise a

programme for

specific

messages

- Explain how to

determine the

target audience

for a

programme

- Explain

production

elements and

their limitations

- Explain how to

hunt for talents

- Explain how to

establish

appropriate

location

- Describe props

and explain

how to

determine the

right props.

- Explain the

factors to put

into

consideration in

preparing

production

budget and give

assignments on

budget

preparation

- Plan basic

radio and

television

programme

Guide students

to plan

radio/TV

programmes

Books

Journals

Internet

169

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 2.0 Know how to prepare scripts for radio and television programmes

3-4 2.1 Prepare a programme script

with a focus

2.2 Script a programme logically,

clearly and simply.

2.3 Script a programme using the

appropriate format

2.4 Script a programme leaving

room for adaptations

2.5 Draw a production script

2.6 Mark out a shooting script

- Explain how to

prepare a

programme script,

ask students to

write clear, simple

and logical scripts,

using appropriate

examples for radio

and television.

- Explain how to write

a script that can be

adapted for the

broadcast media

- Describe how to

prepare a

production script

- Explain how to mark

out a shooting

script

- Differentiate between

radio/TV scripts

Preparation of

scripts for radio

/TV programme

- Prepare scripts

for radio/TV

programme

- Preparation of

scripts for

radio /TV

programme

Preparation of

scripts for

radio /TV

programme

GENERAL OBJECTIVE : 3.0 Know how to present programme for radio and television

5-6 3.1 Deliver a programme with

confidence and poise

3.2 Present a programme in such

a way as to reach audience

effectively with the message

3.3 Portray the policy of the

station and the audience

needs

3.4 Present regular programme

such as news, talk shows,

musical variety, interviews

etc.

- Explain how to

deliver a

programme with

confidence and

poise

- Describe how to

present a

programme that

can effectively

reach the

audience

- Explain how proper

- Present

programmes for

radio/TV

programmes

- Guide students

to present

programme for

Radio/TV

Guide students

to identify the

target audience

Book

Microphones

- Audio

Mixers

- Vison

mixers

- Music

- Computer

- Studio

170

3.5 Present special programmes

such as continuity, sports,

ceremonials commentaries,

documentations etc.

presentation can

portray the policy

of the station and

audience need

- Describe how to

present news, talk

shows, interviews,

etc

- Describe how to

present special

programmes

- Demonstrate

presentation of

these programmes

in the studios

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 4.0 Know how to produce and direct programmes for radio and television

7-8 4.1 Mobilize resources for the

production of regular radio

and television programmes

such as news, talk show,

drama, muscials,

documentaries etc.

4.2 Utilize resources for optimum

production

4.3 Convert message into picture

using the production script

4.4 Control production process

through effective directing

4.5 Assign responsibility

appropriately and with clear

cut directives

4.6 Produce a model programme

4.7 Direct a model programme

4.8 Rehearse programmes before

production

- Explain resources can

be mobilized for

radio and TV

programme

production

- Describe how these

resources can be

utilized to

produce broadcast

prorammes.

- Demonstrate how

messages can be

converted into

pictures

- Demonstrate how a

programme can

be effectively

directed

- Explain how

responsibilities

- Produce

programme

for

radio/TV

programme

Supervisie

programmes

production

Books

Vision Mixer

Audio Mixer

171

can be assigned

- Ask the student to

produce model

programme

- Demonstrate how the

student can direct

a model

programme

- Explain how

programme are

rehearsed before

production

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 5.0 Know how to handle outside broadcast

9-10 5.1 Analyse the problems of

outside broadcast

coverage

5.2 Research an event receiving

outside broadcast

coverage

5.3 Coordinate an outside

broadcast and practical

5.4 Determine the logistics for an

outside broadcst

5.5 Control an outside broadcast

5.6 Comment and report on

outside events

5.7 Use the facilities of the

outside broadcast van for

production

- Analyse the problems

of outside

broadcast

coverage

- Explain how to

conduct research

on an event for

outside broadcast

coverage

- Describe how to

coordinate an

outside broadcast

- Explain how to

determine the

logistics for out

broadcast

- Describe how to

control outside

broadcast

- Explain how to

comment and

report on outside

- Practice

how to

hand OB

Demonstrate

the workings

of an OB Van

172

broadcast

- Explain how to use

the facilities of

outside broadcast

van for

production

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 6.0 Know how to put finishing touches on programme for transmission

11-12 6.1 Edit programmes for radio

and television

6.2 Insert special effects on

programmes for radio and

television

6.3 Present a properly finished

production for radio and

television

6.4 Mix sound in editing

6.5 Dub Programmes

- Demonstrate in the

studio how to

edit programme

- Demonstrate how to

insert special

effects in

programmes

- Demonstrate how to

present a

proramme

- Demonstrate how to

mix sounds in

editing

- Demonstrate how to

dub programmes

- Design an

audience

research proposal

- Ask students

to design

audience

research

proposal.

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 7.0 Understanding audience research techniques

13-14 7.1 Describe various broadcast

research methods

7.2 Explain audience

characteristics

7.3 Explain the link between

characteristics and

programme schedule

7.4 Design a basic audience

research proposal for a

local programme

- Explain

different

broadcast

research

methods

- Describe how

audience

characteristics

affects or

determine

programme

schedule

173

- Explain how a

basic audience

research

proposal can be

designed

- Ask students t

design an

audience

research

proposal for a

local

programme

174

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS COMMUNICATUION

COURSE TITLE: MASS COMMUNICATION LAWS

COURSE CODE: MAC 226

DURATION: 2 HOURS/WEEKS

GOAL: This course is designed to acquaint the students with the legal sanctions and constraints on Mass Communication.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

1.0 Understand the meaning of law and the law of defamation

2.0 Know the major criticisms against the law of libel and its defenCe

3.0 Understand the law of sedition

4.0 Understand contempt of court

5.0 Know restrictions on reportage of court proceedings

6.0 Understand the law of copyright

7.0 Know the Official Secrets Act

8.0 Know the restrictions on invasion of privacy

9.0 Know the of FOI Law

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

COURSE: MASS COMMUNICATION LAW COURSE CODE MAC 226 CONTACT HOURS/CREDIT UNIT 2/

hrs/week 2

YEAR: ND 2 Semester: 2 Pre-requisite:

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THRORY

WEE

K

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 1.0 Understand the meaning of law and the law of defamation

175

THEORETICAL CONTENT PRACTICAL

CONTENT

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher Activities Specific

Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Resources Evaluation

1-2

1.1 Define law

1.2 Define defamation, libel

and slander

1.3 Distinguish between libel

and slander

1.4 Identify important

elements of libel

1.5 Identify types of libel

i. Define law

ii. Explain reasons

for knowledge

of law in mass

communication

iii. Define and

distinguish

between

defamation, libel

and slander

iv. Explain types of

libel

v. Show libel

cases in

Newspaper s

Textbooks

Newspaper

Constitution

Law Reports

Related

Legal

documents

GENERAL OBJECTIVES 2.0 Know the major criticisms against the law of libel and its defence

3-4

2.1 List the various criticisms

against the law of libel

2.2 List the various defences

in libel;

a) Fair comment

b) Rolls of plea

c) Public interest

d) Privilege

i. Explain

opposition and

criticisms

against the law

of libel

ii. Explain types of

defences in libel

e.g fair

comment, public

Textbooks

Newspaper

176

2.3 Explain the defences

interest,

privilege etc

iii. Using

newspapers or

magazines show

evidence of past

libel cases.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES 3.0 Understand the law of sedition

5

3.1 Define sedition

3.2 Examine the law of

sedition in Nigeria

3.3 Explain criminal libel

i. Explain sedition

ii. Explain how the

law of sedition

operates in

Nigeria

iii. Explain the

criminal aspect of

libel

Textbooks

GENERAL OBJECTIVES 4.0 Understand contempt of court

6-7

4.1 Define contempt of

court

4.2 Identify kinds of

Contempt

4.3 Explain sanctions that

may be imposed by the

court

i. Explain

contempt of

court

ii. Explain different

kinds of

contempt

iii. Enumerate the

dos and don‟ts

in court

iv. Describe

penalties and

sanctions be

imposed that can

Textbooks

177

by the courts.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES 5.0 Know restrictions on reportage of court proceedings

8-9

5.1 Identify the restrictions

on reporting of divorce

and ancillary

proceedings.

5.2 Enumerate the

restrictions on the

reporting of proceedings

involving children

5.3 Outline the restrictions on

the reporting of indecent

details, proceeding in

chambers etc

5.4 Explain the restrictions

on the taking of

photographs in court.

i. Explain the

various

restrictions on

news gathering

and reporting in

Nigeria

ii. Describe

restrictions on

court

proceedings e.g

divorce,

children,

indecent details

etc.

iii. Explain other

restrictions in

court

proceedings

such as taking of

photographs etc.

Textbooks

GENERAL OBJECTIVES 6.0 Understand the law of copyright

10-11

6.1 Define copyright

6.2 List the legal restrictions

of musical, dramatic and

artistic works

6.3 Explain copyright in

news, title, nom de

i. Explain

copyright

ii. Explain

copyright

restrictions of

musical,

dramatic and

artistic works

Textbooks

178

plume etc.

6.4 Explain copyright in

works of employees

6.5 Describe remedies for

infringement of copy

right

6.6 Explain period, ownership

and transfer of

Copyright.

iii. Explain

copyright in

title, works of

employees

iv. Explain

compensation

for infringement

of copyright.

v. Explain use,

ownership,

transfer of

copyright.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES 7.0 Know the restrictions on invasion of privacy

12 7.1 Define official

document.

7.2 Describe some offences

that can arise from

snooping

7.3 Explain situations in

which invasion of privacy

may be justified.

i. Describe official

documents

ii. Describe

documents a

reporter can

have access to

iii. Describe

documents a

reporter cannot

have access to:

iv. Explain why a

reporter should

not demand to

see certain

documents.

Textbooks

GENERAL OBJECTIVES 8.0 Know the restrictions on invasion of privacy

1.1 Define snooping i. Explain

179

13

14-15

1.2 Describe same offences

that can arise from

snooping

1.3 Explain situations in

which invasion of privacy

may be justified.

snooping and

the likely

offences that

may arise from

it

ii. Explain invasion

of privacy and

the situations for

its occurrence

iii. Describe how

some situations

may justify

invasion of

privacy

iv. Describe areas

that are

prohibited to the

reporter and

explain reasons

for the

prohibition.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES 9.0 Know the FOI Law

14 9.1 Define FOI

9.2 Trace the history of FOI

Law

9.3 Discuss the provisions of

FOI Law and Official

secrets Act.

Define FOI

Trace the history of FOI

Law

Discuss the provisions

of FOI Law and Official

secrets Act.

Define FOI

Trace the history

of FOI Law

180

MASS COMMUNICATION ND Course Code:

MAC 227

Contact Hours/Credit

Unit: 2

Subject/Course: INVESTIGATIVE AND

INTERPRETATIVE REPORTING

Theoretical: Hours/week

1

Year: ND

Semester:

Pre-Requisite: Practical: Hours/week 1

GOAL: This course is designed to impart in the student the principles of gathering materials and writing in depth about

government, politics, social problems and other current issues. It also examines the implications of these issues on the

relevant segments of the society.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

At the end of this course, students should:

1.0 Understand the principles of investigative reporting

2.0 Know how to conduct investigations

3.0 Know how to present investigative reports

4.0 Understand the principles of interpretative reporting

5.0 Understand how to interpret news situations and events

6.0 Know how to present interpretative reports

181

Course: INVESTIGATIVE

AND INTERPRETATIVE

REPORTING

Course Code:

MAC 227

Contact Hours/credit Unit: 2

Theoretical: 1 Hours/Week

Year: ND 1

Semester: 2nd

Pre-Requisite: Practical: 1

Hours/week

General Objectives 1.0: : Understand the principles of investigative reporting

Theoretical Content Practical Content

Week Specific Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’s activities Specific Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’s

activities

Resources Evaluation

1-3 1.1 Define investigative

reporting

1.2 State the purposes of

investigative reporting

1.3 Examine issues which

most often lend

themselves to

investigative reporting

e.g. government policies,

tax evasions, disasters,

epidemics etc.

1.4 Describe the process of

investigative reporting

i. Explain what

interpretation

means

ii. Explain the

importance of

investigative

reports in mass

communication

iii. Explain

situations

which provide

grounds for

investigative

- List the principles of

investigative reporting

- Enumerate situations

that lend themselves to

investigative reports

Discuss

principles of

investigative

reporting

Books

Mass Media

personal

source

Internet

Journals

Quiz

182

e.g. research, interview,

independent probe etc.

1.5 Explain the ethical

implications of

investigative reporting

1.6 Explain the legal

implications of

investigative reporting

reporting e.g.

government

activities, tax

evasion,

disasters,

epidemics

social

upheavals etc.

iv. Explain the

steps involved

in investigating

reports(research

, interviews,

independent

probe etc)

v. Explain the

ethical

consideration in

investigative

reporting

vi. Explain the

legal

implication or

limitation to

investigative

reporting

4-5 General Objectives 2.0: Know how to conduct media investigations

183

2.1 Explain strategies and

tactics of media

investigations.

2.2 Explain the various

sources of investigative

reports

2.3 Describe ways of

cultivating sources of

exclusive reports.

2.4 Carry out investigations

and report

i. Explain how

investigative

reporting is

conducted

ii. Identify and

define various

sources of

investigative

reports

iii. Describe how

to gain and

maintain the

assistance and

confidence of

reliable

sources of

information

Demonstrate how to

conduct media investigation

Guide students

on how to

conduct

investigative

reports.

Guide students

to prepare

investigative

reports

Books

Mass Media

Personal

sources

6-7 General Objectives 3.0: Know how to present investigation reports

3.1 Explain the structure of

investigative report.

3.2 Explain the language

requirement of

investigative reports

3.3 Explain how to present

an investigative report on

topical issue

3.4 Produce reports on issues

i. Explain the

different parts

of an

investigative

report.

ii. Explain how

investigative

reports are

written,

emphasizing

language

(style, usages

etc)

iii. Assign and

supervise the

execution of

an

Books

Mass Media

Personal

sources

Field Work

184

investigative

reportage

project

8-10 General Objectives 4.0: Understand the principles of interpretative reporting

4.1 Define interpretative

reporting.

4.2 State the purpose of

interpretative reporting

4.3 Examine the kinds of

issues, which most often

lend themselves to

interpretative reporting

4.4 Describe the process of

interpretative reporting

4.5 Outline the various

approached to

interpretative reporting

4.6 Explain the legal

implications of

interpretative reporting

-Explain the term

interpretative

reporting

-Explain the

significance of

interpretative

reporting

-Explain various

issues the present

opportunities of

interpretation (e.g

political situations

national policies,

gender issues, major

sports events and

international

developments etc

-Explain the various

stages of

interpretative report

(e.g. identification

references, analysis,

presentation etc)

List the principles

interpretative reporting

Enumerate situations that

lend themselves to

interpretative reporting

Demonstrate how to

interpret reports.

Discuss

principles of

interpretative

reporting

Guide students

on how to

conduct

interpretative

reporting

Guide students

to present

interpretative

reporting

Books

Mass Media

Personal

sources

11-12 General Objectives 5.0: Understand how to interpret news and situations and events

5.1 Explain the types of

situations that demand

interpretative reports.

5.2 Explain the various

methods of interpreting

i. Explain

situations and

events that

demand

interpretation

List the principles

interpretative reporting

Discuss

principles of

interpretative

Books

Mass Media

Personal

185

news situations and

events

ii. Enumerate

various

methods of

interpreting

news events

and situations

Enumerate situations that

lend themselves to

interpretative reporting

Demonstrate how to

interpret reports.

reporting

Guide students

on how to

conduct

interpretative

reporting

Guide students

to present

interpretative

reporting

sources

13-14 General Objectives 6.0: Know how to present interpretative reports

6.1 Explain the structure of

an interpretative reports

6.2 Explain the language of

interpretative reports

6.3 Present an interpretative

report on a tropical issue.

i. Explain the

various parts

of an ideal

interpretative

report.

ii. Assign and

supervise

production of

interpretative

reports

Books

Mass Media

Personal

sources

Field Work

186

Department/ Programme: NATIONAL

DIPLOMA IN MASS COMMUNICATION

Course Code:

MAC 228

Contact Hours: 2

Subject/Course: MASS MEDIA,

DEMOCRACY AND GOVERNANCE

DURATION: 2

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE:

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours/week

2

Year: ND11 Semester: 2nd Pre-requisite: Practical: hours /week

GOAL: The course is designed to expose students to the role of the Mass Media in deepening democracy and good governance

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course the student should:

1.0 Understand the concept of good governance

2.0 Understand the institutions of governance

3.0 Understand the roles of international institutions in promoting good governance and democracy

4.0 Understand the concept of democracy

5.0 Understand the roles of the Mass Media in deepening democracy and good governance

6.0 Understand role of civil society in democracy and good governance

187

Course: MASS MEDIA,

DEMOCRACY AND

GOVERNANCE

Course Code: MAC 228 Contact

Hours 4:

Course Specification:

Year:

HND1

Pre-requisite: - Practical: hours /week

Theoretical Content Practical

Content

General Objectives: 1.0 Understand the concept of good governance

Week Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/Practical)

Specific

Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Evaluation

1-

3

1.1 Define

governance

1.2 Explain the

dimensions of

governance e.g.

political system,

rule of law,

corruption,

political stability

etc.

1.3 Explain

governance in

Nigeria

1.4 Define

governance

1.5 Explain the

principles of

good governance

e.g. participation,

Define

governance

Explain

political

system, rule of

law,

corruption,

political

stability etc.

Relate the

points above to

governance in

Nigeria

Explain the

principles of

good

governance

Book ,

internets

1.8 Explain the

following

terms:

political

system, rule

of law,

corruption,

and political

stability.

188

transparency,

accountability,

people-

centeredness,

responsive, rule

of law, equity

etc.

1.6 Differentiate

governance from

good governance

1.7 Explain the

benefits of good

governance

Show the

difference

between

governance

and good

governance

State policy

respect in the

country of

nations

patriotism

Book ,

internets

General Objectives: 2.0 Understand the institutions of governance

4-

6

2.1 List the

institutions of

governance e.g.

Executive,

Legislature,

Judiciary,

Political parties,

Civil societies,

NGOs etc.

2.2 Explain the roles

of the 3 arms of

government in

governance

2.3 Explain the roles

of political

parties, civil

societies, NGOs,

pressure groups

List the

institutions of

governance

e.g. Executive,

Legislature,

Judiciary,

Political

parties, Civil

societies,

NGOs etc.

Explain the

roles of the 3

arms of

government in

governance

Explain the

roles of

political

Book ,

internets

189

etc in governance

e.g. voice,

participation,

political and

economic.

2.4 Explain the role

of the Media in

sustainability of

good governance

investigative

reporting,

interpretation

reporting,

holding

government

accountable to

the people,

defending the

rights of the

people to know.

2.5 Reviews of

international best

practices in good

governance

reporting, being

ethical, standing

in position of the

oppressed

parties, civil

societies,

NGOs,

pressure

groups etc in

governance

e.g. voice,

participation,

political and

economic.

Explain the

role of the

Media in

sustainability

of good

governance

investigative

reporting,

interpretation

reporting,

holding

Book ,

internets

190

191

7-8 General Objectives: 3.0 Understand the roles of international institutions in promoting good governance and democracy

3.1 List the different

international

institutions

operating in Nigeria

e.g. UNDP,

UNESCO

ECOWAS, AU,

NEPAD etc.

3.2 Explain the

activities of these

institutions in

promoting good

governance and

democracy in

Nigeria.

3.3 Enumerate the

challenges facing

these international

institutions in

promoting

democracy and

good governance

Enumerate the

different

international

institutions

operating in

Nigeria e.g.

UNDP,

UNESCO

ECOWAS, AU,

NEPAD etc.

Explain the

activities of these

institutions in

promoting good

governance and

democracy in

Nigeria.

List the

challenges facing

these

international

institutions in

promoting

democracy and

good governance

Explain the

activities of the

following

institutions in

Nigeria:

UNDP,

UNESCO

ECOWAS, AU,

NEPAD etc

9-11 General Objectives: 4.0 Understand the concept of democracy

4.1 Define democracy

4.2 Explain the types

of democracies e.g.

parliamentary

democracy,

Explain what is

democracy

Explain the types

of democracies

192

constitutional

democracy, Social

democracy.

4.3 Explain the

elements of

democracy e.g.

constitutionalism,

Independent

Judiciary, free

media, democratic

elections, freedom

of speech,

protection of

minority rights,

transparency, civil

control of the

military freedom of

the press, freedom

of interaction

4.4 Explain the

operation of these

elements in Nigeria,

vis-à-vis good

governance

Explain the

elements of

democracy e.g.

constitutionalism,

Independent

Judiciary, free

media,

democratic

elections,

freedom of

speech,

protection of

minority rights,

transparency,

civil control of

the military

freedom of the

press, freedom of

interaction

General Objectives: 5.0 Understand the roles of the Mass Media in deepening democracy and good governance

193

12-

14

5.1 Explain the roles of

mass media in the

society

5.2 Describe the mass

media a platform

for social

engineering e.g.

promote human

rights, peace,

concensus building,

transparency,

accountability,

social tolerance,

freedom of speech

etc.

5.3 Explain the

limitations of the

Mass Media in

promoting

democracy and

good governance in

Nigeria and its

implications for

democracy

5.4 Explain the

performance of the

Mass Media under

democratic rule in

Nigeria since 1999

Explain the

elements of

democracy e.g.

constitutionalism,

Independent

Judiciary, free

media,

democratic

elections,

freedom of

speech,

protection of

minority rights,

transparency,

civil control of

the

Books,

internets

Explain the

elements of

democracy e.g.

constitutionalism,

Independent

Judiciary, free

media,

democratic

elections,

freedom of

speech,

protection of

minority rights,

transparency,

civil control of

the

194

195

HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA (HND) IN MASS

COMMUNICATION

196

GENERAL INFORMATION

1.0 GOAL AND OBJECTIVES

HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMA (HND)

PROGRAMME GOAL:

The HND Mass Communication programme is intended to produce effective and efficient technologists with adequate practical and

professional skills necessary for employment and job creation in the various areas of Mass Communication industry such as Newspapers,

Magazines, Radio, Television, Film and Video, News media, Public Relations, Advertising, News Agency, Government and corporate

Information services.

PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this programme, the diplomate should be able to carry out/perform all the listed functions specified under the objectives

of the ND programme at a higher level and with little or no supervision at all.

a) Gather, investigate and report news for the print, broadcast and online media

b) Elect, edit and prepare for publication, news items, features, photographic graphics and multimedia materials and results of

investigations for print and

c) Produce, present and direct programmes for the electronic media

d) Produce, present, and direct programmes

e) Plan, prepare and produce materials for public relations and advertising purposes.

f) Source various outlets/contacts for commercial utilization of feature and magazine articles

g) Publish features and magazine articles.

h) Negotiate terms for publishing articles and rights of the article author.

197

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS FOR HND PROGRAMME

Holders of the ND who want to study for the HND must have maintained a cumulative grade point average of not less than 2.5 (on a 4.0

scale) in their ND course work, and must in addition have completed at least one year of professional work in the mass media since

obtaining the ND in order to qualify for admission.

In exceptional cases a candidate who had a cumulative grade point average of between 2.0 and 2.49 in their ND programme must have

acquired at least two years of cognate experience in order to qualify for admission.

2.1 CURRICULUM

The curriculum consists of four main components. These are:

v. General Studies

vi. Foundation Courses

vii. Professional Courses

The General Studies component shall include courses in:- Arts and Humanities: English Language, indigenous language and foreign

language History.

Social Sciences; Citizenship (the Nigerian constitution), Political Science, Sociology, Philosophy and Geography Citizenship, Education

and Entrepreneurship, are compulsory.

2.3 The general Studies component shall account for not more than 10-15% of total contact hours for the programme.

2.4 Foundation courses include courses in English, Languages, Basic Computer Applications. The number of hours will account for about 10-

15% of the total contact hours.

2.5 Professional Courses are the core Mass communication Courses which give the student the theory and practical skills needed to practice in

Mass Communication. These may account for between 60-70% of the contact hours.

2.6 Students Industrial Work Experience Scheme(SIWES) shall be taken during the long vacation following the end of the second semester of

the first year.

3.0 CURRICULUM STRUCTURE

3.1 HND PROGRAMME

198

The structure of the ND programme consists of four semesters of classroom, Laboratory and Studio activities in the institution and a. Each

semester shall be of 17 weeks duration made up as follows: 15 contact weeks of teaching, i.e. Lecture, Recitation and Practical Exercise

tests, quizzes, etc and 2 weeks for examination and registration.

4.0 ACCREDITATION

The Higher National Diploma (HND) in Mass Communication shall be accredited by NBTE before the diplomates can be awarded the

diploma certificate. Details about the process of accrediting a programme for the award of the HND are available from the Executive

Secretary, Programme Department, NBTE Plot „B‟, Bida Road, P.M.B. 2239, Kaduna, Nigeria.

5.0 CONDITIONS FOR THE AWARD OF THE DIPLOMA

Institutions offering accredited programmes should award the National Diploma/ Higher National Diploma to candidates who have

successfully completed the programme after passing prescribed course work, examinations, diploma project and the supervised industrial

work experience. Such candidates should have completed a minimum of between 72 and 80 semester credit units.

The Diplomas shall be classified as follows:

Distinction - GPA of 3.50 and above

Upper Credit – GPA of 3.00 – 3.49

Lower Credit – GPA of 2.50 – 2.99

Pass - GPA of 2.00 – 2.49

Fail - GPA of below 2.00

6.0 GUIDANCE NOTES FOR TEACHERS TEACHING THE PROGRAMME

6.1 The new curriculum is drawn in course units. This is in keeping with the provisions of the National Policy on Education which stresses

the introduction of the semester credit units, which will enable a student who so wishes to transfer the units already completed in an

institution to another of similar standard .

6.2 In designing the unit, the principle of the modular system by product has been adopted thus making each of the professional modules,

when completed, provide the student with technical operative skills, which can be used for job creation and employment purposes.

6.3 As the success of the credit unit system depends on the articulation of programmes between the institutions and industry, the curriculum

Content has been written in behavioral objectives, so that the expected performance of the student who successfully completed the courses

of the programme is clear to it. There is a slight departure in the presentation of the performance based curriculum which requires the

conditions under which the performances are expected to be carried out and the criteria for the acceptable levels of performance to be

stated. It is a deliberate attempt to get the staff of the department teaching the programme to write their own curriculum stating the

conditions existing in their institution under which the performance can take place and to follow that with the criteria for determining an

199

acceptable level of performance. The Academic Board of the institution may vet departmental submission on the final curriculum. The

aim is to continue to see to it that a solid internal evaluation system exists in each institution for ensuring minimum standards and quality

of education in the programmes offered throughout the polytechnic system.

6.4 The teaching of the theory and practical work should, as much as possible, be integrated. Practical exercises, especially those in

professional courses and studio work should not be taught in isolation from the theory. For each course, there should be a balance of

theory to practice in the ratio of 50:50 or 60:40 or the reverse.

National Board for Technical Education

Kaduna. 6th June, 2014

200

CURRRICULUM TABLE

HND 1 FIRST SEMESTER BROADCAST OPTION

COURSE

CODE

COURSE TITLE L T P CU CH

GNS 322 SOCIOLOGY OF THE

FAMILY

3 - 3 3

GNS 320 OUTLINE HISTORY OF

AFRICA

3 - 3 3

MAC 311 STATISTICS 3 - 3 3

MAC 312 COMMUNICATION SERIES 2 - 2 2

MAC 313 ADVANCED REPORTING 2 - 1 3 3

MAC 314 ADVERTISING COPY

WRITING AND LAYOUT

3 - 3 3

MAC 315 PUBLIC RELATIONS COPY

WRITING

1 - 2 3 3

201

MAC 316 RADIO PRODUCTION

TECHNIQUES

1 - 2 3 3

MAC 317 CONFLICT REPORTING 1 - 1 2 2

TOTAL 19 - 6 25 25

202

HND 1 FIRST SEMESTER PRINT OPTION

COURSE

CODE

COURSE TITLE L T P CU CH

GNS 322 SOCIOLOGY OF THE

FAMILY

3 - 3 3

GNS 320 OUTLINE HISTORY

OF AFRICA

3 - 3 3

MAC 311 STATISTICS 3 - 3 3

MAC 312 COMMUNICATION

SERIES

2 - 2 2

MAC 313 ADVANCED

REPORTING

2 - 1 3 3

MAC 314 ADVERTISING COPY

WRITING AND

LAYOUT

3 - 3 3

MAC 315 PUBLIC RELATIONS

COPY WRITING

1 - 2 3 3

203

MAC 317 CONFLICS

REPORTING

1 - 1 2 2

Mac 318 ADVANCED

PHOTOJOURNALISM

2 - 1 3 3

TOTAL 20 - 5 25 25

204

HND 1 2ND

SEMESTER BROADCAST OPTION

COURSE

CODE

COURSE TITLE L T P CU CH

GNS 321 INTERNATIONAL

RELATIONS

3 - 3 3

GNS 322 SOCIAL

PHYLOSOPHY

3 - 3 3

MAC 321 MASS COMM

RESEACH

3 - 3 3

MAC 322 ENVIRONMENTAL

REPORTING

1 - 1 2 2

MAC 323 INTERNATIONAL

COMMUNICATION

2 - 2 2

MAC 324 INTER PERSONAL

COMMUNICATION

2 - 2 2

205

MAC 325 WRITING MEDIA

CRITIQUE

2 - 2 2

MAC 326 ADVERTISING

CAMPAIGN AND

EXECUTION

2 - 1 3 3

Mac 327 MULTIMEDIA AND

ONLINE

JOURNALISM 1

1 - 1 2 2

MAC 328 TELEVISION

PRODUCTION

TECHNIQUES

1 2 3 3

TOTAL 20 - 5 25 25

206

HND 1 2ND

SEMESTER PRINT OPTION

COURSE

CODE

COURSE TITLE L T P CU CH

GNS 321 INTERNATIONAL

RELATIONS

3 - 3 3

GNS 322 SOCIAL

PHYLOSOPHY

3 - 3 3

MAC 321 MASS COMM

RESEACH

3 - 3 3

MAC 322 ENVIRONMENTAL

REPORTING

1 - 1 2 2

MAC 323 INTERNATIONAL

COMMUNICATION

2 - 2 2

MAC 324 INTER PERSONAL

COMMUNICATION

2 - 2 2

MAC 325 WRITING MEDIA

CRITIQUE

2 - 2 2

207

MAC 326 ADVERTISING

CAMPAIGN AND

EXECUTION

2 - 1 3 3

Mac 327 MULTIMEDIA AND

ONLINE

JOURNALISM 1

1 - 1 2 2

MAC 329 ADVANCED

EDITING

1 2 3 3

TOTAL 20 - 5 25 25

208

HND 11 FIRST SEMESTER BROADCAST OPTION

COURSE

CODE

COURSE TITLE L T P CU CH

MAC 411 REPORTING

SCIENCE AND

TECHNOLOGY

2 - 2 2

MAC 412 EDITORIAL WRITING

MAC 413 MEDIA

ORGANISATION AND

MANAGEMENT

2 - 2 2

MAC 414 COMMUNITY

JOURNALISM AND

BROADCASTING

2 - 1 3 3

MAC 415 MULTIMEDIA AND

ONLINE

JOURNALISM II

1 - 2 2

209

MAC 416 RADIO NEWS

PRODUCTION

2 - 1 3 3

MAC 417 FILM PRODUCTION

TECHNIQUES

1 2 3 3

EED 413 ENTREPRENEURSHIP

DEVELOPMENT

3 - 3 3

TOTAL 13 - 4 18 18

210

HND 11 FIRST SEMESTER PRINT OPTION

COURSE

CODE

COURSE TITLE L T P CU CH

MAC 411 REPORTING

SCIENCE AND

TECHNOLOGY

2 - 2 2

MAC 412 EDITORIAL WRITING

MAC 413 MEDIA

ORGANISATION AND

MANAGEMENT

2 - 2 2

MAC 414 COMMUNITY

JOURNALISM AND

BROADCASTING

2 - 1 3 3

MAC 415 MULTIMEDIA AND

ONLINE

1 - 2 2

211

JOURNALISM II

MAC 418 NEWSPAPER

PRODUCTION

1 2 3 3

MAC 419 BOOK PUBLISHING 1 1 2 2

EED 413 ENTREPRENEURSHIP

DEVELOPMENT

3 - 3 3

TOTAL 12 - 4 16 16

212

HND 11 SECOND SEMESTER BROADCAST OPTION

COURSE

CODE

COURSE TITLE L T P CU CH

MAC 421 MEDIA WRITING,

REVIEW AND

CRITIQUE

2 - 1 3 3

MAC 422 COMMUNITION

AND NATIONAL

DEVELOPMENT

2 2 2 2

MAC 423 PUBLIC RELATIONS

CASE STUDIES

2 - 1 3 3

MAC 424 ADVERTISING CASE

STUDIES

1 1 2 2

MAC 425 ADVANCED

RADIO/TV

PRODUCTION

2 - 1 3 3

213

MAC 426 POLITICAL

COMMUNICATION

2 2 2

MAC 430 RESEARCH

PROJECT

- - 3 3

MAC 427 ADVANCED

BROADCAST NEWS

PRODUCTION

2 1 3 3

TOTAL 13 - 10 21 18

214

HND 11 SECOND SEMESTER PRINT OPTION

COURSE

CODE

COURSE TITLE L T P CU CH

MAC 421 MEDIA WRITING,

REVIEW AND

CRITIQUE

2 - 1 3 3

MAC 422 COMMUNITION

AND NATIONAL

DEVELOPMENT

2 2 2 2

MAC 423 PUBLIC RELATIONS

CASE STUDIES

2 - 1 3 3

MAC 424 ADVERTISING CASE

STUDIES

1 1 2 2

MAC 425 ADVANCED

RADIO/TV

PRODUCTION

2 - 1 3 3

MAC 426 POLITICAL

COMMUNICATION

2 2 2

215

MAC 430 RESEARCH

PROJECT

- - 3 3

MAC 428 MAGAZINE

PRODUCTION

1 2 3 3

TOTAL 12 - 11 21 18

216

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course the student should:

1.0 Know statistics

2.0 Understand the measures of central tendency

3.0 Understand the measures of positional values

4.0 Understand the measures of variability

5.0 Understand charts and graphs

6.0 Appreciate level of significance

7.0 Understand association

8.0 Understand the concept of skewness

9.0 Understand the concept of time series

10.0 Know the concept of regression and correlation

11.0 Understand of concept of index number

12.0 Understand statistical package of the social sciences

Department/ Programme: HIGHER

NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS

COMMUNICATION

Course Code:

MAC 311

Contact Hours: 3

Subject/Course: STATISTICS FOR SOCIAL

SCIENCES

DUCATION: 5

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE:

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours/week 1

2

Year: HNDI FIRST Semester: Pre-requisite: Practical: 1 hours /week

GOAL: this course is designed to introduce the students to nature and uses of statistics, and to develop their ability to collect compile

and present statistical data

217

Course: : STATISTICS FOR

SOCIAL SIENCES

Course Code: MAC 311 Contact Hours

3:

Course Specification:

Year:

HND1

Pre-requisite: - Practical: hours /week

Theoretical Content Practical Content

General Objectives: 1.0 Know statistics

Week Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/Practical)

Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Evaluation

1 Definition

1.1 define statistics

1.2 Discuss the importance

of statistics in the

social sciences

Explain the

meaning and

importance of

statistics

Define central

tendency

Explain

measures of

variability

Statistical tables

Annual and periodic

reports from

government and non-

governmental and all

other relevant records

Create statistical

data

Interpret statistical

records

Show statistical

data from other

organizations

Illustrate

various

measures of

central tendency

Design

histogram,

graphs and

charts

Students to use

already existing

records to

interpret

statistical

method

General Objectives: 2.0 Understand the measures of central tendency

218

2-3 2.1 Explain central

tendency

2.2 Define the various

measures of central

tendency (mean media

mode)

2.3 Compute the mean

media and mode from

ungrouped and

grouped data.

2.4 State the properties of

arithmetic mean.

2.5 Apply the properties in

2.4 above in computing

the mean

2.6 Estimate media and

mode using statistical

graphs positional verbs

Explain central

tendency

Define the

various

measures of

central tendency

(mean media

mode)

Compute the

mean media and

mode from

ungrouped and

grouped data.

State the

properties of

arithmetic

mean.

Apply the

properties in 2.4

above in

computing the

mean

Estimate media

and mode using

statistical graphs

positional verbs

Computers with

relevant software

Library resources

Internet etc

General Objectives: 3.0 Understand the measures of positional values

4 Positional Verbs 3.1 Define the various

positional measures

(quartiles deciles

percentiles )

3.2 Design ogive using the

frequency table.

3.3 Compute quartiles,

Explain the

various

positional

measures

(quartiles

deciles

percentiles )

Define the

quartiles deciles

and percentiles

Design ogive

using the

frequency table.

219

deciles and percentiles

using appropriate

formula

3.4 Interprets the result of

the ogive

Design ogive

using the

frequency table.

Compute

quartiles,

deciles and

percentiles

using

appropriate

formula

Interprets the

result of the

ogive

Interprets the

result of the

ogive

General Objectives: 4.0 Understand the measures of variability

5 The measures of

Variability 4.1 Explain variation

4.2 Define the various

measures of variability

(range, quartile deviation,

percentile range, mean

deviation, variance and

standard deviation).

4.3 Compute mean

deviation, variance and

standard deviation.

4.4 Interprets various

relative measures of

variability (coefficient)

Explain

variation,

Measures of

variability

range, quartile

deviation,

percentile range,

mean deviation,

variance and

standard

deviation.

Compute mean

deviation,

variance and

standard

deviation.

Interprets

various relative

measures of

graphs and

charts

Explain

variation,

Measures of

variability

range, quartile

deviation,

percentile range,

mean deviation,

variance and

standard

deviation

220

variability

(coefficient)

General Objectives: 5.0 understand charts and graphs

6 Charts and Mean

Graphs

5.1 Design histogram,

graphs and charts to

present words and figures.

5.2 Compare bar charts

and histograms.

5.3 Compare line graph

with frequency polygon

5.4 Explain component

bar chart and Z chart

Design

histogram,

graphs and

charts to present

words and

figures.

Compare bar

charts and

histograms.

Compare line

graph with

frequency

polygon

Explain

component bar

chart and Z

chart

graphs and

charts

Design

histogram,

graphs and

charts to present

words and

figures

General Objectives: 6.0 Appreciate level of significance

7 Level of Significance

6.1 Define confidence

limits

6.2 Compute Z statistics

and design curve

6.3 Interpret confidence

interval and

proportions

6.4 Explain merging of

error and level of

significance with

relevant statistical

Define

confidence

limits

Compute Z

statistics and

design curve

Interpret

confidence

interval and

proportions

Explain merging

of error and

PRACTICAL

NOT REQUIRED

graphs and

charts

graphs and

Define

confidence

limits

Compute Z

statistics and

design curve

Interpret

confidence

interval and

proportions

Explain

221

computation

6.5 Explain degree of

freedom from

statistical competitions.

6.6 Explain difference of

proportion test at

different confidence

levels.

6.7 Compute one tailed

and two tailed tests.

level of

significance

with

Explain

difference of

proportion test

at different

confidence

levels.

charts difference of

proportion test

at different

confidence

levels.

General Objectives: 7.0 Understand association

8 Association

Explain coefficient of

correlation and least

square.

7.2 Compute chi square (

s2) with the aid of formula

7.3 Work examples of

least square, coefficient of

correlation and chi square

7.4 Analyse the use of

proportions

7.5 Interpret result of

proportions

Explain

coefficient of

correlation and

least square.

Compute chi

square ( s2) with

the aid of

formula

Work examples

of least square,

coefficient of

correlation and

chi square

Analyse the use

of proportions

Interpret result

of proportions

PRACTICAL

NOT REQUIRED

Explain

coefficient of

correlation and

least square.

Compute chi

square ( s2)

General Objectives: 8.0 Understand the concept of skewness

9 Skewness

8.3 Define moments of

various degrees

8.4 Compute moments of

Define moments

of various

degrees

PRACTICAL

NOT REQUIRED

Define moments

of various

degrees

222

various degrees

8.5 Explain the various

measures of skewness

8.6 Compute measures of

skewness

8.7 Interpret measures of

skewness

Compute

moments of

various degrees

Explain the

various

measures of

skewness

Compute

measures of

skewness

General Objectives: 9.0 Understand the concept of time series

10 Times Series

9.1 Define Time series

9.2 Give examples of time

series

9.3 Graph a time series

data

9.4 Explain the four basic

components of time series

(viz, trend, seasonal,

cyclical and irregular

movements).

9.5 Define moving

average.

9.6 Compute seasonal

variation and seasonal

index.

examples of

time series

Graph a time

series data

Explain the

four basic

components of

time series (viz,

trend, seasonal,

cyclical and

irregular

movements).

Define moving

average.

Compute

seasonal

variation and

seasonal index.

Practical not

required

Define TIME

SERIES and

moving average.

Compute

seasonal

variation and

seasonal index

of a given

computation

General Objectives: 10.0 Know the concept of regression and correlation

11 Regression and

correlation

10.1Distinguish between

regression and

Distinguish

between

regression and

correlation.

223

correlation.

10.2Plot a scatter diagram

10.3Explain rank

correlation

10.4Interpret rank

correlation coefficient.

Plot a scatter

diagram

Explain rank

correlation

Interpret rank

correlation

coefficient

General Objectives: 11.0 Understand of concept of index number

12 Index Number

10.1 Explain index

numbers

10.2 State uses of index

numbers

10.3 List the various

types of index numbers

10.4 Construct various

types of index

numbers.

10.5 Interpret various

types of index numbers

Explain index

numbers

State uses of

index numbers

List the various

types of index

numbers

Construct

various types of

index numbers.

Interpret various

types of index

Practical not

required

List the various

types of index

numbers

Construct

various types of

index numbers

General Objectives: 12.0 Understand statistical package of the social sciences

13-14 12.1 List uses of

statistical package of

social sciences

12.2 Understand how to

input data into

statistical package of

social sciences

12.3 Run statistical

package of social

sciences

12.4 Interpret the data

List uses of

statistical

package of

social sciences

Understand how

to input data

into statistical

package of

social sciences

Run statistical

package of

Practice the uses of

statistical package of

social sciences

Guide students to

Practice the uses of

statistical package

of social sciences

statistical

packages

List uses of

statistical

package of

social sciences

224

Department/ Programme: HIGHER

NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS

COMMUNICATION

Course Code:

MAC 312

Contact Hours: 3

Subject/Course: COMMMUNICATION

THEORIES

DUCATION: 5

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE:

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours/week 1

2

Year: HND2Semester: 1

ST Pre-requisite: Practical: 1 hours /week

GOAL: This course is designed to give the students theoretical foundation for the study of mass communication as well as provide a

base for appreciating abstract thinking and logical deductions

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course the student should:

1.0 Understand the role of theories in the development of the social sciences

2.0 Understand the historic and contemporary approaches to the study of communication

3.0 Understand kinds of mass communication theories

4.0 Understand theories of media effects

5.0 Functional uses of the mass media

6.0 Understand the cultural dimensions of communication theories

7.0 Understand electronic media violence of the society

8.0 Understand technological determinism in communication theory

social sciences

Interpret the

data

225

Course: : COMMMUNICATION

THEORIES

Course Code: MAC 312 Contact Hours

3:

Course Specification:

Year:

HND1

Pre-requisite: - Practical: hours /week

Theoretical Content Practical

Content

General Objectives: 1.0 Understand the role of theories in the development of the social sciences

Week Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/Practical)

Specific

Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Evaluation

1-2 Theories

1.1 Define Theory.

1.2 Explain such terms as

concept, construct,

model, hypothesis, etc.

1.3 Explain the basis of a

theory.

1.4 Explain the use of

theories.

1.5 Analyse the functions

of theories in the social

sciences.

1.6 Analyse mass

communication as a

social and behavioural

science.

Explain with

local examples

the role of

theories in

development of

social sciences

Trace the history

or origin of

mass

communication

theory.

Practical not

required

Class

discussions

Group

discussions

Application of

the discussion

General Objectives: 2.0 Understand the historic and contemporary approaches to the study of communication

226

3-4 Historic and

Contemporary

Approaches

2.1 Analyse the historical

background of

communication study.

2.2 Explain some early

communication

models by lasswel,

scharmn/weaver,

newscombs gerbner

etc.

2.3 Analyse Scharmn‟s

model of

communication

2.4 Explain individual

definition of theories.

Explain theories

of media effects.

Explain the uses

and gratification

approach

Explain the

cultural

dimensions of

communication

theories

Identify the

effects of media

violence on the

society

Explain

Theory as a

component of

the project

General Objectives: 3.0 Understand kinds of mass communication theories

5-6 Kinds of mass

communication theories

3.1 Explain normative

theories of mass

communication.

3.2 Explain social

scientific theories of

mass communication.

3.3 Understand working

theories of mass

communication.

3.4 Describe everything

theories of mass

communication.

Explain

normative

theories of mass

communication.

Explain social

scientific

theories of mass

communication.

Understand

working theories

of mass

communication.

Describe

everything

theories of mass

Practical not

required

Books and

internets

Explain

normative

theories of mass

communication.

social scientific

theories of mass

communication

227

communication

General Objectives: 4.0 Understand theories of media effects

7-8 Theories of media effects

4.1 Explain all powerful

effects.

4.2 Describe limited

effects theories.

4.3 Explain step flow

theories.

Explain all

powerful effects.

Describe limited

effects theories.

Explain step

flow theories

General Objectives: 5.0 Functional uses of the mass media

9 Uses of the mass media

5.1 Explain uses and

gratification approach

5.2 Explain agenda setting

and agenda building.

5.3 Define gate keeping

Explain uses and

gratification

approach

Explain agenda

setting and

agenda building.

Define gate

keeping

Explain

gratification

approach

And agenda

setting

General Objectives: 6.0 Understand the cultural dimensions of communication theories

10-11 Communication

Theories

6.1Describe cultivation

theories.

6.2 Explain diffusion of

Innovation.

6.3 Explain cultural and

media imperialism.

Describe

cultivation

theories.

Explain

diffusion of

Innovation.

Explain cultural

and media

imperialism

Explain the

cultivation

theories and

diffusion of

Innovation

General Objectives: 7.0 Understand electronic media violence of the society

12 Electronic Media

violence on the society

Explain electronic media

Explain

electronic media

violence

Explain

electronic

media violence

228

violence

7.2 List the theories of

electronic media violence

:Carthersis, Aggressure

cues, Leaning and

refinement

7.3 Explain theories of

electronic violence

List the theories

of electronic

media violence

:Carthersis,

Aggressure

cues, Leaning

and refinement

Explain theories

of electronic

violence

List the theories

of electronic

media violence

General Objectives: 8.0 Understand technological determinism in communication theory

13-14 Technological

Determinism in

Communication

Theories

8.1 Describe technological

Determinism in

Communication

theories

8.2 Explain theories

associated with new

media

8.3 Define glocalization

and globalization;

media convengence,

diversities pluralism

Describe

technological

Determinism in

Communication

theories

Explain theories

associated with

new media

Define

globalization

and

globalization;

media

convergence,

diversities

pluralism

Explain theories

associated with

new media

Define

globalization

229

Course: : ADVANCED

REPORTING

Course Code: MAC 313 Contact Hours

4:

Course Specification:

Year:

HND1

Pre-requisite: - Practical: hours /week

Theoretical Content Practical

Content

General Objectives:

On completion of this course the student should:

1 Know how to write and report on government policies and activities

2 Know how to report social problems

3 Understand how to handle news on the arts in the print media

4 Know how to cover other specialised news situations

5 Know how to write human interest story

6 Understand news analysis, news features and interpretation

7 Know impressionistic reporting

Course: : ADVANCED

REPORTING

Course Code: MAC 313 Contact Hours

4:

Course Specification:

230

Year:

HND1

Pre-requisite: - Practical: hours /week

Theoretical Content Practical

Content

General Objectives: 1.0 Know how to write and report on government policies and activities

Week Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/Practical)

Specific

Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Evaluation

1-2 Government Policies

and Activities

1.1 Identify government

tropical policies

1.2 State sources of news

from government

policies

1.3 Analyse the special

problems and

intricacies of

reporting

government policies

1.4 Explain how to

handle leaks and deal

with official secrets

Art

1.5 Write news on

government policies

1.6 Analyse how to

report good

policies

Identify

tropical

government

policies

List sources of

government

policies

Explain special

problems

reporting

government

policies

Analyse FOI

and artificial

secrets art

Analyse social

problems

during human

trafficking,

ethic religion

crisis ,

prostitution etc

Textbooks

Journals

Interest Magazine

Show sources

of news on

government

policies

Identify

problems in

reporting

government

policies

-Blow whistle

-Identify social

problems and

how they

persist

watch

principles and

techniques of

reporting social

problems

231

1.7 Analyse how to

report social policies

Explain

principles and

technology of

reporting social

problems

General Objectives: 2.0 Know how to report social problems

3-4 Social Problems

2.1 Identify various

social problems, eg

drug trafficking,

child abuse,

prostitution, etc.

2.2 State the dominant

principles and

techniques in

reporting social

problems, viz

fairness, objectivity

balance, etc.

2.3 Write indepth news

on social problems.

Identify

various social

problems, eg

drug

trafficking,

child abuse,

prostitution,

etc.

State the

dominant

principles and

techniques in

reporting social

problems, viz

fairness,

objectivity

balance, etc.

Write in depth

news on social

problems

See various social

problems, eg drug

trafficking, child

abuse, prostitution,

etc.

Show the dominant

principles and

techniques in

reporting social

problems, viz

fairness, objectivity

balance, etc.

Source for in depth

news on social

problems

Guide students

to See various

social

problems, eg

drug

trafficking,

child abuse,

prostitution,

etc.

Show the

dominant

principles and

techniques in

reporting social

problems, viz

fairness,

objectivity

balance, etc.

Source for in

depth news on

social problems

Living

environment ,

organizations

Social media

Explain

various social

problems, eg

drug

trafficking,

child abuse,

prostitution,

etc.

General Objectives: 3.0 Understand how to handle news on the arts in the print media

Arts News

3.1 Identify various

popular arts.

List various

popular arts.

Write stories

Popular arts.

newspapers

and magazine

Write stories

about the arts

for newspapers

and magazine

232

3.2 Write stories about

the arts for

newspapers and

magazine

about the arts

for newspapers

and magazine

General Objectives: 4.0 Know how to cover other specialised news situations

Specialised News

4.1 Identify various

specialised news

situation e.g.

parliamentary,

courts/tribunals,

labour, sorts, health

education etc.

4.2 Write news for the

situations named in

4.1 above

Identify

various

specialised

news situation

e.g.

parliamentary,

courts/tribunals

, labour, sorts,

health

education etc.

Write news for

the situations

named in 4.1

above

Watch various

specialised news

situation e.g.

parliamentary,

courts/tribunals,

labour, sorts, health

education etc.

Write news for the

situations named in

4.1 above

Show various

specialised

news situation

e.g.

parliamentary,

courts/tribunals

, labour, sorts,

health

education etc.

Write news for

the situations

named in 4.1

above

TV , Radio,

news papers

Write news for

the situations

an identify

situation.

General Objectives: 5.0 Know how to write human interest stories

Human interest stories

5.1 Explain the

principles and

rationalale for human

interest stories.

5.2 Distinguish between

human interest and

other kinds of stories

5.3 Write human interest

stories

Explain the

principles and

rational ale for

human interest

stories.

Distinguish

between human

interest and

other kinds of

stories

Write human

interest stories

TV and Films Explain the

principles and

rational ale for

human interest

stories.

233

General Objectives: 6.0 Understand news analysis, news features and interpretation

News Analysis,

Features and

Interpretation

6.1 Define news

analysis, news

feature and

interpretation.

6.2 Prepare stories

demonstrating

knowledge of news

analysis and news

interpretation

Define news

analysis, news

feature and

interpretation.

Prepare stories

demonstrating

knowledge of

news analysis

and news

interpretation

Practice analysis of

news feature and

interpretation.

Demonstrate news

analysis and news

interpretation

Guide students

to Practice the

analysis of

news feature

and

interpretation.

Demonstrate

news analysis

and news

interpretation

TV , RADIO Write news

analysis and

news

interpretation

General Objectives: 7.0 Know impressionistic reporting

Impressionistic

Reporting

7.1 Define

impressionistic

reporting.

7.2 Explain the

techniques

involved in

impressionistic

reporting

7.3 Identify the

pitfalls in

impressionistic

reporting

7.4 Write

impressionistic

news stories

Define

impressionistic

reporting.

Explain the

techniques

involved in

impressionistic

reporting

Identify the

pitfalls in

impressionistic

reporting

Write

impressionistic

news stories

Practical not required Paper and pen Define

impressionistic

reporting.

Explain the

techniques

involved in

impressionistic

reporting

Write

impressionistic

news stories

234

PROGRAMME: MASS COMMUNICATION HND I

COURSE TITLE: ADVERTISING COPYWRITING AND LAYOUT

COURSE CODE: 314

DURATION: 6 HOURS/WEEKS

GOAL: This course is designed to expose the student to the fundamental principles and techniques involved in the conception,

processing and production of advertisement copies for various media.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

1.0 Know the definition of advertising copywriting

2.0 Know the stages in advertising copywriting

3.0 Know the basic functions of copy

4.0 Know the key copywriting principles

5.0 Know the elements that constitute copy for the various media

6.0 Know how to write copy for the various media

7.0 Know how to define layouts

8.0 Know key principles in the preparation of layouts

9.0 Know how to prepare layouts for the various media

10.0 Know how to assess effective copy and layout

11.0 Know production techniques

235

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

COURSE: ADVERTISING COPYWRITING AND

LAYOUT

COURSE CODE MAC 372 CONTRACT HOURS/CREDIT UNIT 6/

hrs/week 2

YEAR: 400 Semester: 1ST

Pre-requisite:

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THEORY

WEE

K

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 1.0 Know the definition of advertising copywriting

THEORETICAL CONTENT

PRACTICAL

CONTENT

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher Activities Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Resources Evaluation

1.1 Define Advert copy

1.2 Define copywriting

1.3 Distinguish between

copywriting and other

forms of writing, e.g.

article writing, feature

writing, fiction writing,

drama writing etc.

- Explain the

meaning of Advert

copy

- Explain the stages

in copy writing

- Explain copy

writing principles

- Explain layout

definitions and

example

- Practical examples

- Able to

produce

good copy

layouts

- Produce good

out door

layouts

- Conduct field

visits to

advertising

agencies.

- Computer

with relevant

softwares

- Books

- Advert lab

students

Multi-media

equipments

- Practical

examples to

students visits

to Advert

Agencies

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 2.0 Know the stages in advertising copywriting

2.1 List the key stages in the

development of

advertising copy e.g.

List the key stages in

the

development of

-

236

study of advertising brief,

study of research results,

testing of the product to

identify the target

audience, unique product

benefit, main usage of

product as well as

preparation of creative

strategy

2.2 Define creative strategy

2.3 Describe the key elements of

a creative strategy e.g.

target audiene, desired

bran image, basic

consumer benefit,

supporting evidence and

advertising goals

objectives.

advertising

copy e.g. study

of advertising

brief, study of

research results,

testing of the

product to

identify the

target audience,

unique product

benefit, main

usage of

product as well

as preparation

of creative

strategy

2.2 Define creative

strategy

2.3 Describe the key

elements of a creative

strategy e.g. target

audiene, desired bran

image, basic consumer

benefit, supporting

evidence and

advertising goals

objectives.

GENERAL OBJECTIVE : 3.0 Know the basic functions of an advert copy

3.1 List the basic functions of

advert copy

3.2 Explain the various functions

List the basic functions

of advert copy

Explain the various

functions

No practical is

required

List the basic

functions of

advert copy

Explain the

various

functions

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 4. Know the key copy writing principles

237

4.1 List key principles of

copywriting

4.2 explain each of the principles

List key principles of

copywriting

explain each of the

principles

List key

principles of

copywriting

explain each of

the principles

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 5.0 Know the elements that constitute copy for the various media

5.1 Explain the elements in

newspaper/magazine copy

5.2 Explain the elements that

make up television copy or

script.

Explain the elements in

newspaper/magazin

e copy

Explain the elements

that make up television

copy or script.

Explain the

elements in

newspaper/m

agazine copy

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 6.0 Know how to write copy for the various media

6.1 Write advert copy for press,

i.e. newspaper and magazine

advertisement.

6.2 Write special copy e.g.

classified, sales letters and

obituaries

6.3 Write personal paid

announcement for radio

6.4 Write radio commercial script

for mass consumer

6.5 Write personal paid

announcements for television

6.6 Write television commercial

script for consumer goods,

services and corporate bodies.

6.7 Write copy for outdoor

posters, point-of-sale items

and give-aways

68 Write copy for online media.

Write advert copy for

press, i.e.

newspaper and

magazine

advertisement.

Write special copy e.g.

classified, sales

letters and

obituaries

Write personal paid

announcement for

radio

Write radio

commercial script for

mass consumer

Write personal paid

announcements for

television

Write television

commercial script for

consumer goods,

Write advert

copy for

press, i.e..

, sales letters and

obituaries ,

personal paid

announcemen

t for radio,

radio

commercial

script for

mass

consumer

238

services and corporate

bodies.

Write copy for outdoor

posters, point-of-

sale items and give-

aways

68 Write copy for

online media.

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 7.0 Know how to define layouts

7.1 Define layout

7.2 List various types of layout

7.3 Describe various types of

layouts

Define layout

List various types of

layout

Describe various types

of layouts

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 8.0 Know key principles in the preparation of layouts

8.1 Define balance , unity,

harmony, contrast rhythm

and proportion

8.2 Describe white space or white

elements

8.3 Define optical centre or

centre of focus or focal point

and anchorage

8.4 List popular type of faces.

8.5 List popular point sizes for

headlines and body type

Define balance , unity,

harmony, contrast

rhythm and

proportion

Describe white space

or white elements

Define optical centre

or centre of focus or

focal point and

anchorage

List popular type of

faces.

List popular point

sizes for headlines

and body type

Define balance ,

unity,

harmony,

contrast

rhythm and

proportion

optical centre or

centre of

focus or

focal point

and

anchorage

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 9.0 Know how to prepare to layouts for the print media

9.1 Explain the role of colour in

advertisement layouts

Explain the role of

colour in

No practical Explain the role of

colour

239

9.2 Prepare small poster layouts

9.3 Prepare layouts of handbills

9.4 Prepare newspaper, radio, TV

and online, magazine

advertisement layouts.

9.5 Prepare layouts for billboards

advertisement

layouts

Prepare small poster

layouts

Prepare layouts of

handbills

Prepare newspaper,

radio, TV and

online, magazine

advertisement

layouts.

Prepare layouts for

billboards

small poster

layouts

in radio, TV and

online,

magazine

advertisemen

t layouts.

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 10.0 Know how to assess effective copy and layout

1.1 Explain general

assessment criteria

1.2 Explain assessment

criteria for press

copy/layout

1.3 Explain assessment

criteria for outdoor

poster copy/layout

1.4 Explain assessment

criteria for radio copy

1.5 Explain assessment

criteria for

television/film copy

1.6 Explain assessment

criteria for online copy

production techniques

Explain general

assessment criteria

And criteria for press

copy/layout

-Explain assessment

criteria for outdoor

poster copy/layout

-criteria for radio copy

-criteria for

television/film copy

-criteria for online

copy production

techniques

radio and

television

Explain

assessment

criteria for

outdoor poster

copy/layout

-criteria for radio

copy

-criteria for

television/film

copy

-criteria for

online copy

production

techniques

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 11.0 Know Production Techniques

11.1 Describe production

techniques

11.2 Explain various

production techniques

Describe production

techniques

Explain various

production techniques

See production

techniques

for newspapers,

magazines, radio;

Guide students to

See production

techniques

for newspapers,

Newspapers

magazines, radio

and TV

Explain various

production

techniques for

newspapers,

240

for newspapers,

magazines, radio; TV

and online media

11.3 Explain the role of

Computer in modern

advertising copy

production

for newspapers,

magazines, radio; TV

and online media

Explain the role of

Computer in modern

advertising copy

production

TV and online

media

-appreciates the

role of Computer

in modern

advertising copy

production

magazines, radio;

TV and online

media

-appreciates the

role of Computer

in modern

advertising copy

production

magazines, radio;

TV and online

media

PROGRAMME: MASS COMMUNICATION HND I

COURSE TITLE: PUBLIC RELATIONS COPY WRITING

COURSE CODE: MAC 315

DURATION: 3 HOURS/WEEKS

GOAL: This course is designed to enable the student to write, produce and distribute good public relations copy to various mass

media organizations and similar institutions. It also aims at enabling the student to organize public relations functions.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

1.0 Know how to prepare public relations copy for the media and other channels

2.0 Understand the role of the mass media as public relations channels

3.0 Understand the role of conferences and seminars as public relations channels

4.0 Know the other media of communication in public relations

5.0 Know the promotional aspects of the public relation

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

COURSE: PUBLIC RELATIONS COPYWRITING COURSE CODE MAC 315 CONTRACT HOURS/CREDIT UNIT 6/

hrs/week 2

241

YEAR: 400 Semester: 1ST

Pre-requisite:

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THEORY

WEE

K

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 1.0 Know how to prepare public relations copy for the media and other channels

THEORETICAL CONTENT

PRACTICAL

CONTENT

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher Activities Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Resources Evaluation

1.1. Define public relations

copy

1.2. Identify media for public

relations copy

1.3. Illustrate the layout and

writing procedure for

press release for different

media

1.4. Illustrate the layout and

writing procedure for

house organs and news

letters.

1.5. Outline the compilation

and publication methods

of annual reports

1.6. Describe the distribution

channels of the various

public relations copy and

media

- Discuss Public

Relations copy,

layout, writing

procedure for house

organs and

distribution channels

of P.R copy.

- Produce

good out

door layouts

Guide

students to

produce a

good layout

- Books

- Journal

- Computer with

relevant

software

- Annual Report

of companies

- Public Address

systems

- Relevant task

- Evaluate their

copy and

press release

- Hands on

activities

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 2.0 Understand the role of the mass media as a public relations channels

2.1. Outline the roles of

newspapers and

magazines as public

relations channels

2.2 Outline the roles of radio and

television as public

Discuss the media as

Public Relations tool

as in 2.1 to 2.4

Identify the print,

broadcast and

online media

public Relations

channels

Show the

role of

films, print,

broadcast

and online

media as

TV,FILMS - Outline the

roles of

newspapers

and magazines

as public

relations

242

relations channels

2.3 Demonstrate the role of film

as a public relations

channel

2.4 Outline the role of online

media as public relations

channels.

Public

Relations

channels

GENERAL OBJECTIVE : 3.0 Understand the role of conferences and seminars as public relations media

3.1 Identify roles of conferences

and seminars in public

relations

3.2 Outline steps for organizing

public relations conferences

and seminars.

Explain the functions

of conferences and

seminars .

Plan for a Public

Relations

conference and

seminar.

State the role of

conference and

seminar in P.R

Guide students

on how to

organize a

Public Relations

Conference and

seminar.

Samples Of

Public

Relations

Conference

And Seminar

Papers

Outline steps

for organizing

public

relations

conferences

and seminars.

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 4. Know the other materials used in public relations

4.1 Identify materials used in

public relations

4.2 Explain the uses of these

materials in public relations

Explain the

different

materials used

in Public

Relations.

See the

different

materials used

in Public

Relations

Show the

different

materials used in

Public Relations

Materials Enumerate the

different

materials used in

Public Relations

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 5.0 Know the promotional aspects of public relations

5.1 Explain promotion as a P.R.

tool

5.2 Identify special events used

in Public Relations, press

briefing, press visits,

exhibitions, etc.

5.3 Explain as P.R. tools

5.4 Organise conventions, fairs,

and special showings, e.g.

new facility

5.5 Explain the use of share

holders meetings, annual

general meetings, and other

Explain promotion as a

P.R. tool

Identify special events

used in Public

Relations, press

briefing, press visits,

exhibitions, etc.

Explain the use of

shareholders meetings,

annual general

meetings, and other

List special

events used

in Public

Relations,

press

briefing,

press visits,

exhibitions

243

similar gatherings as P.R.

tools

similar gatherings as

P.R. tools

244

Department/ Programme: MASS

COMMUNICATION/ HIGHER NATIONAL

DIPLOMA (HND)

Course Code: MAC 316

Contact Hours: 3

Subject/Course: RADIO PRODUCTION

TECHNIQUES

DURATION: 3 HOURS/WEEK Theoretical: hours/week 1

Year: HND I Semester: 2

nd Pre-requisite: Practical: 1 hours /week

GOAL: This course is designed to upgrade the students skill in the techniques of radio production.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

1.0 Know the operational techniques of a radio studio/equipmen

2.0 Know how to use microphones

3.0 Know how to script various programmes

4.0 Know how to handle recorded and live productions

5.0 Know how to produce different programmes

6.0 Know how to conduct post production activities

245

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

COURSE: RADIO PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES COURSE CODE MAC 316 CONTRACT HOURS/CREDIT UNIT 3/

hrs/week

YEAR: HND I/ Semester: 1ST

Pre-requisite:

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THEORY

WEE

K

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 1.0: Know how to plan a basic radio and television programme

THEORETICAL CONTENT

PRACTICAL

CONTENT

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher Activities Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Resources Evaluation

1-2 1.1 Describe the audio

console.

1.2 Explain the audio

recorder

1.3 Explain how to record

and reproduce sounds

1.4 Explain the use of non-

verbal cues

Explain how to operate

the console.

Explain how to use

audio recorders.

Demonstrate how to

record and play back

sounds.

Describe non-verbal

cue.

Identify console

Demonstrate

operation of

console

Demonstrate

recording and

play back of

sounds

Guide students to

operate console

Show how

recording is done

Studio

Console

Recorders

Microphones

Assignments

Quiz

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 2.0: Know how to use microphones

5-6 2.1 Identify different polar

patterns

2.2 Explain microphone

placement or positioning

2.3 Explain factors that distort

sound in use of

microphone

2.4 Explain the relationship

between sound quality

and microphone qualify

Explain polar

patterns.

Demonstrate

microphones

placement.

List factors that

distort sound in

microphone use.

Explain

microphone

Identify polar

patterns

Demonstrate

microphone

placement

Show students

various

Polar patterns

Guide students to

select

miicrophones.

Microphones,

Microphones

stands (floor,

table, boom, etc).

Assignments

Quiz

246

selection for

different

programmes

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 3.0: Know how to script for various programmes

3.1 Explain the differences

between script for broadcast

and script for print

3.2 Explain the full script,

partial-script, and other

script formats.

3.3 Explain the news script

format

3.4 Describe how to write script

for drama, documentaries,

talks shows, variety shows,

etc.

Differentiate between

writing for broadcast

and writing for print

Explain full-script,

partial-script, fact

sheet, etc formats.

Explain the layout for a

news script.

Explain the drama,

documentary and other

script approaches

Sample scripts

from various

stations

Textbooks

Show differences

between broadcast

and print scripts

Demonstrate

writing and

preparation of

scripts

Guide students to

write different

kinds of scripts

Give assignments

to students.

Grade and

discuss in class.

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 4.0: Know how to handle recorded and live productions

9-10 4.1 Define recorded production

4.2 Define live production

4.3 Explain the necessity

recording programmes

4.4 Explain the necessity for live

production

4.5 List the challenges of live

production, such as

acoustics, location etc.

4.6 Explain how to plan and

conduct live shows

Define recorded and

live productions.

Give reasons why

recorded productions is

carried out.

Give reasons why it

may be necessary to

engage in live

production.

List the problems of

live production

Microphones

Audio Recorders

Differentiate

between recorded

and live production

Identify reasons for

recorded

production

Identify reasons for

live production

List problems of

live production

Direct students to

watch recorded

and live

prorammes

Guide students to

produce such

programme

Microphones

Audio

Records

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 5.0: Know how to produce different programmes

11-12 5.1 Explain the phases and stages Identify the phases Studio console, Identify the Guide students to Give assignments

247

of radio drama

production, conception

of programme idea,

assignment, rehearsal,

preparation, script

editing, budgeting, etc.

5.2 Describe how to make

different kinds of

documentary

5.3 Explain how to make a

magazine programme.

a. Select programme title

b. Choose signature tune,etc

5.4 Explain the production

process of a news

programme

5.45. Explain how to produce

discussion, variety and

other programmes

and stages of drama,

production stages of a

documentary

List the steps involve

in producing a

magazine programme

Microphones

Editing Facility,

Computer with

audio editing

software

e.g. Adobe

Audition

phases/stages of

drama production

Show programmes

such as

documentary,

music, variety,

discussion etc.

Identify the

phases/stages of

drama production

Show

programmes such

as documentary,

music, variety,

discussion etc.

in production

guide and discuss

in class.

248

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 6.0: Know how to conduct post-production activities

13-14 6.1 Explain post-

production

activities

6.2 Explain why post-

production

activities are

carried out

6.3 List the activities

involved in post-

production, e.g.

editing, dubbing

6.4 Explain the

considerations to

make in editing a

recorded

programme

- Define post-

production .

- List reasons for

post-production

activities

- Identify

activities

involved in

post-production

Computer

Software

Demonstrate how

to edit a

programme

Show activities

involved in post-

production, e.g.

editing, dubbing

Explain the

considerations to

make in editing a

recorded programm

Supervise

students in post-

production

editing.

Give editing

assignments

PROGRAMME: MASS COMMUNICATION HND I

COURSE TITLE: CONFLICT REPORTING

COURSE CODE: MAC 317

DURATION: 2 HOURS/WEEKS

GOAL: This course is intended to develop and strengthen the students interest in reporting environment isues.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

1.0 Understanding the concept of conflict

2.0 Know the different types of conflicts in human societies

3.0 Know the causes and sources of conflict

4.0 Understand the various theories of conflict

249

5.0 Understand media role during conflict

6.0 Understand the strategies of reporting during conflict

7.0 Film shows on conflict in Hotel Rwanda, Imam & Pastor

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

COURSE: CONFLICT REPORTING COURSE CODE MAC 317 CONTRACT HOURS/CREDIT UNIT

hrs/week 2

HND 1 Semester: 2ND

Pre-requisite:

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THEORY

WEE

K

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 1.0 Understand the concept of conflict

THEORETICAL CONTENT

PRACTICAL

CONTENT

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher Activities Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Resources Evaluation

1.1 Define conflict

1.2 Explain conflict from

the domestic setting

- Explain the

meaning of

conflict

- Explain conflict

from various

perspectives

Demonstrate in

understanding of

conflict

Demonstrate

individualism in

various perspective

Guide students to

understand the

meaning of

conflict.

Textbooks Assignments

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 2.0 Know the different types of classification of conflict in human societies

2.1 Distinguish the various

forms of conflict from

sociological, political,

economic perspective

Explain forms of

conflict

Explain conflict from

various disciplinary

perspective

Demonstrate industry

of the different

conflict types of

localline

understanding

Guide students to

understand

differences in

conflict

Books Assignments

GENERAL OBJECTIVE : 3.0 Know the causes and sources of conflict

3.1 enumerate the causes of

conflict

Explain causes of

conflict

Acknowledge the

causes and sources of

conflict

Guide the students

in understanding

causes and sources

of conflict in the

local area

Books Assignments

250

251

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 4.0 Understand the various theories of conflict

4.1 State the various theories

of conflict

4.2 Explain relevance of the

theories to the Nigerian

situation

Explain the various

theories of conflict

Explain the functions

and dysfunction of each

Books Assignments

Quiz

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 5.0 Understand media role during conflict

5.1 Examine media role

during conflict

5.2 Identify reporting

techniques in conflict

situations

Explain how the media

rights conflict Explain

reporting strategies in

conflict

Books Demonstrate media

roles in conflict

reporting

Demonstrate

strategies of

reporting

- Guide on

media role

and

techniques of

reporting

during conflict

Assignments

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 6.0 Understand the strategies of Reporting Conflict

6.1 Explain the strategies of

media reporting conflict

6.2 Describe the risk factors

in reporting conflict

- Explain the strategies

of reporting conflict by

the media

- Explain the risk

involved in conflict

reporting

Books - Demonstrate

understanding of

strategies of

reporting conflict

show the risk

involved in

reporting conflict

- Guide

students in

strategies of

conflict report

and the risk

involved

Assignments

PROGRAMME: MASS COMMUNICATION HND I

COURSE TITLE: MASS COMMUNICATION RESEARCH

COURSE CODE: MAC 321

DURATION: 3 HOURS/WEEKS

GOAL: This course designed to prepare students on how to design, conduct write and present a research report

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

252

On completion of this course, the student should:

1.0 Understand the quantitative and qualitative approaches to scientific inquiry

2.0 Know various mass communication research methods in Nigeria

3.0 Know how to design a research project

4.0 Know how to gather data for the research project

5.0 Understand appropriate research reporting style

PROGRAMME: HIGHER NATIONAL DIPLOMAL IN MASS COMMUNICATION

COURSE: MASS COMMUNICATION

RESEARCH

COURSE CODE MAC 321 CONTACT HOURS/CREDIT UNIT 3/

hrs/week 2

YEAR: 300 Semester: 2ND

Pre-requisite:

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THEORY

WEE

K

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 1.0: Understand the quantitative and qualitative approaches to scientific inquiry

THEORETICAL CONTENT

PRACTICAL

CONTENT

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher Activities Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Resources Evaluation

1-3 1.1 Define scientific inquiry

1.2 Describe common

approaches to scientific

inquiry

1.3 Distinguished between

inquiry in the physical

and social sciences

1.4 Analyse scientific attitude

and scientific orientation

- Explain scientific

inquiring

- Explain research

method

- Explain research

designs

- Explain appropriate

research reporting

styles

- Explain research

gathering

No practical

required

Textbooks

Journals

Research reports

Computer with

appropriate

relevant software

(SPSS)

- Do mock

survey

- Do mock

content

Analysis

- Do mock

historical

research etc.

- Assign more

practical

assignment

Critique the

mock survey

253

and content

analysis

- Critique

assignments.

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 2.0: Know various mass communication research methods

4-5

2.1 Explain qualitative research

method

2.2 Explain the quantitative

research method

2.3 Explain content analysis

2.4 Explain the experimental

research method

2.5 Explain the survey method

Explain qualitative

research

method

Explain the

quantitative research

method

Explain content

analysis

Explain the

experimental

research

method

2.5 Explain the survey

method

No practical

required

Textbooks

Journals

Internet

GENERAL OBJECTIVE : 3.0 Know how to design research project

6-9 3.1 Explain research design

3.2 Identify research design types

3.3 Conceptualize the research

problem

3.4 Explain operational

definition of terms

3.5 Narrow down the operational

definition to specifics

3.6 State the basic assumptions

for a research project

3.7 Explain the methodology for

a research project

3.8 Review relevant literature

Explain research

design

List types of research

design

Explain research

problem

Explain operational

definition of terms

Explain basic

assumptions for a

research work

Explain research

methodology

Explain literature

No practical

required

Textbooks

Journals

Samples of

research report

Give

assignment

Grade the

assignments

Discuss

outcome in

class with the

students

254

review

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 4. Know how to gather data for the research project

10-11 4.1 Use the quantitative method

4.2 Use the qualitative method

4.3 Use the personal interview

4.4 Design questionnaires

4.5 Use questionnaires

4.6 Use pretest as a sample

survey technique

4.6 Analyse data

4.7 Evaluate the data

Explain how to use the

qualitative and

quantitative methods

Explain how to

conduct a personal

interview

Explain how to use

questionnaires

Explain how to analyse

data

No practical

required

Textbooks

Journals

Samples research

reports

Computer with

appropriate

software

255

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 5.0 Understand appropriate research reporting styles/format, Tile page, Approval, Dedication (optional)

Acknowledgement , Abstract, Table of Content, List of Illustrations, Introduction

Chapter 1

1. Lit. Review 2. Methodology 3. Data Presentation 4. Summaries, Conclusion and Recommendation, 5. Bibliography 6. Appendixes

12-14 5.1 Identify appropriate reporting

styles

5.2 Explain elements in the

format

5.3 Explain different referencing

styles

List reporting styles

Explain the elements in

the reporting format

Explain different

referencing styles and

bibliography.

Books

Journal

Styles

manuals

Quizzes and

assignments

BN: Every

student should do

a mini research

project or prepare

a research

proposal at the

end of the course

PROGRAMME: MASS COMMUNICATION HND I

COURSE TITLE: INTERNATIONAL COMMUNICATION

COURSE CODE: 323

DURATION: 3 HOURS/WEEKS

GOAL: This course is designed to impact to the student knowledge of the nature. It examines the impact of internet,

communication technology on international communication as well as globalization. It also highlights major carriers of

international communication

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

2.0 Understand the definition of international communication

3.0 Know the history of international communication

4.0 Understand important concepts in international communication

5.0 Know the media of international communication

6.0 Appraise the adequacy or otherwise of the different media of international communication

256

7.0 Understand the politics of international communication

8.0 Understand the history and role of international news agencies

9.0 Know international communication organizations

10.0 Understand the impact of ICT on International communication

11.0 Understand the problems of International communication

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

COURSE: INTERNATIONAL

COMMUNICATION

COURSE CODE MAC 323 CONTRACT HOURS/CREDIT UNIT 3/

hrs/week 2

YEAR: 400 Semester: 2ND

Pre-requisite:

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THRORY

WEE

K

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 1.0 Understand the definition of international communications

THEORETICAL CONTENT

PRACTICAL

CONTENT

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher Activities Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Resources Evaluation

1.1 State various definitions

of international

communication

1.2 Distinguish between

international

communication and other

types of communication

1.3 Discuss the important

models of international

communication

- Explain

international

communication

- Explain global news

flow

- Explain the politics

of international

communication

- Explain the role of

international News

Agency

- Identify

international

communication

organisation

- Explain the

problems of

No practical is

required - Books

- Internet

- Satellite

Broadcast

- Ask the

students how

they use the

internet and

its impact on

them.

- Direct

students to go

on line on

intenrational

News agency

257

international

communication

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 2.0 Know the history of international communication

2.1 Outline the landmarks in

international

communication e.g.

printing

2.2 Trace the history of external

broadcasting

2.3 Trace the history of Satellite

TV

2.4 Trace the history of the

Internet

Explain the landmarks

in international

communication

e.g. printing

Give the history of

external

broadcasting

Satellite TV

And the Internet

Satellite TV Give the history

of

external

broadcasti

ng

Satellite TV

And the Internet

GENERAL OBJECTIVE : 3.0 Understand important of concepts in international communication

3.1 Explain global news flow

3.2 Explain developing

countrie‟s concept of

news flow.

3.3 Media Imperialism

3.4 Explain media globalization

Explain global news

flow

Explain developing

countrie‟s

concept of

news flow.

Media Imperialism

Explain media

globalization

Internet Explain global

news flow

in

developing

countries

Media

Imperialis

m

And media

globalization

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 4. Know the media of international communication

4.1 State the functions of cables,

radio, television, satellite,

facsimiles, newspapers,

magazines, laser, computers,

etc as vehicles of

international communication

4.2 Identify the internet and news

media in the international

communication.

Explain the functions

of cables, radio,

television, satellite,

facsimiles,

newspapers,

magazines, laser,

computers, etc as

vehicles of

international

Illustrate the

functions of

cables, radio,

television,

satellite,

facsimiles,

newspapers,

magazines,

laser,

Guide students in

Illustrating the

functions of

cables, radio,

television,

satellite,

facsimiles,

newspapers,

magazines,

newspapers,

magazines, laser,

computers, TV

What is the

functions of

cables, radio,

television,

satellite,

facsimiles,

newspapers,

magazines, laser,

computers in

258

4.3 State the role of film in

international communication

4.4 Explain the role of books and

online publishing in

international communication

communication

State the role of film

in international

communication

Explain the role of

books and online

publishing in

international

communication

computers,

etc as

vehicles of

international

communicati

on

See the role of

film in

international

communicati

on

laser,

computers, etc

as vehicles of

international

communication

see the role of

film in

international

communication

international

communication

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 5.0 Understand the politics of international communication

5.1 Explain the concept of free

and balanced flow of

information

5.2 Analyse the concept of the

global village

5.3 Explain political perspective

on global communication

5.4 Explain the

economic/cultural

implications of

international mass

communication

5.5 Explain foreign policy

implication

5.5 Discuss the developing

countries‟ position on

global communication –

development

communication

Discuss the concept of

free and

balanced flow

of information

Analyse the concept of

the global

village

Explain political

perspective on global

communication

Explain the

economic/cultural

implications of

international mass

Discuss the developing

countries‟ position on

global communication

– development

communication

Practical not

required

1 Explain free

and balanced

flow of

information

in a global

village

Discuss the

developing

countries‟

position on

global

communication –

development

communication

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 6.0 Understand the role of International News Agency

259

6.1 List the major global news

agencies e.g. Reuters,

TASS, aFP, AP, UPI,

NCNA, KYIODO of

Japan in modern news

agency

6.2 Analyse the operations of the

international news

agencies

6.3 Analyse the developing

world‟s news agencies

and their roles

6.4 Discus the history,

ownership, functions,

problems and prospect of

the News Agency of

Nigeria.

List the major global

news agencies

e.g. Reuters,

TASS, aFP,

AP, UPI,

NCNA,

KYIODO of

Japan in

modern news

agency

Analyse the operations

of the

international

news agencies

developing world‟s

news agencies

and their roles

Discus the history,

ownership,

functions,

problems and

prospect of the

News Agency

of Nigeria.

Explain

operations

of the

internatio

nal news

agencies

GENERAL OBJECITVE: 7.0 Know international communication organizations

7.1 List the major international

communication

organizations, e.g. ITU,

International Telecoms

Union

7.2 Explain the role of ITU

7.3 Outline the major causes of

International

communication

List the major

international

communication

organizations,

Explain the role of

ITU

Outline the major

causes of International

communication

List the major

international

communication

organizations

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 8.0 Understand the problems of International communication

260

8.1 Explain the concept of

cultural imperialism as a

problem

8.2 In international

communication explain

the social political

problem

8.3 Evaluate the problems of

social media

8.4 Analyse the problems of

trans-border security

Explain the concept

of cultural imperialism

as a problem ,

- In international

communication

--social political

problem

- Evaluate the

problems of social

media

And trans-border

security

What is

imperialism

and what are

the problem

that are

associated

with it

Department/ Programme: NATIONAL

DIPLOMA IN MASS COMMUNICATION

Course Code:

MAC 324

Contact Hours: 3

Subject/Course: INTERPERSONAL

COMMUNICATION

DUCATION: 4

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE:

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours/week 1

2

Year: HND1 Semester: 2

nd Pre-requisite: Practical: 1 hours /week

GOAL: This is designed to equip the students with ideas and knowledge that will enable them to communicate effectively with people on a face-

to-face basis

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course the student should:

1.0 Know the meaning of interpersonal communication

2.0 Understand aspects of interpersonal communication

3.0 Understand the principles of group dynamics

4.0 Understand the role of interpersonal communication in altitude and behaviour change

261

Course: : INTERPERSONAL

COMMUNICATION

Course Code: MAC 324 Contact Hours

4:

Course Specification:

Year:

HND1

Pre-requisite: - Practical: hours /week

Theoretical Content Practical

Content

General Objectives: 1.0 Know the meaning of interpersonal communication

Week Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/Practical)

Specific

Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Evaluation

Meaning

1.1 Define interpersonal

communication

1.2 List interpersonal

communication

situations

1.3 Explain interpersonal

communication

situation

1.4 Outline differences

between interpersonal

communication and

other types of

communication

Explain

interpersonal

communication

Explain various

types of

interpersonal

communication

Explain

interpersonal

communication

situation

Explain theories

of value

Textbooks

Video tape,

Notebooks

Films

Video Recorders

Textbooks

Video tape,

Notebooks

Films

Video Recorders

practice

interpersonal

relationship for

convenience

communication

skills

practice

interpersonal

relationship for

convenience

communication

skills

Explain altitude

Explain

Behaviour

Change

Assign students

to observe

individual

groups and

present report

Evaluate reports

Evaluate group

assignments

General Objectives: 2.0 Understand aspects of interpersonal communication

Aspects

2.1 Describe the theories

of value, human

nature, human needs,

Explain

philosophy of

humanism

Video Players

practice

interpersonal

relationship for

Guide students

to practice

interpersonal

Evaluate reports

Evaluate reports

262

human behaviour and

human relationship.

2.2 Explain the impact of

human altitude and on

the development of

interpersonal

communication

2.3 State the philosophy

of humanism and the

impact o culture on

human relations

2.4 Distinguish between

verbal and non- verbal

communication in

interpersonal

communication

Explain verbal

and non -verbal

communication

Define group,

leadership and

group dynamics

List the

between verbal

and non- verbal

communication

in interpersonal

communication

Computer convenience

communication

skills

relationship for

convenience

communication

skills

General Objectives: 3.0 Understand the principles of group dynamics

Group Dynamics

3.1 Define group

3.2 Explain group

dynamics

3.3 Explain group norms

and group culture

3.4 List the factors that

facilitate consensus

within the group

3.5 Explain the concept of

leadership in group

dynamics

Define group

-Explain group

dynamics

- group norms

and group

culture

Explain the

factors that

facilitate

consensus

within the

group,

Practical not

required

Define group

- group

dynamics

- group norms

and group

culture

What are the

factors that

facilitate

consensus

within the

group,

263

PROGRAMME: MASS COMMUNICATION HND I

COURSE TITLE: WRITING MASS MEDIA CRITIQUE

COURSE CODE: 325

DURATION: 3 HOURS/WEEKS

3.6 Explain human

dynamics

concept of

leadership in

group dynamics

and human

dynamics

General Objectives: 4.0 Understand the role of interpersonal communication in altitude and behaviour change

4.1 Define altitude role

4.2 Explain altitude

change

4.3 Define behaviour

4.4 Explain behaviour

change

4.5 Identify role of

interpersonal

communication in

altitude and behaviour

change

Define altitude

role

And altitude

change

Define behavior

and behaviour

change

Identify role of

interpersonal

communication

in altitude and

behaviour

change

Define altitude

and altitude

change ,

behavior and

behavior change

264

GOAL: This course is designed to develop the students knowledge in writing critiques of mass media content in print, film,

broadcast and online media

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

1.0 know critical thinking

2.0 know critical writing

3.0 Understand the purpose of C.R.

4.0 Know the qualities of a critique/Reviewer

5.0 Kinds of media critique

6.0 Analyse sample critique/reviews

7.0 Know how to Write Reviews

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

COURSE: WRITING MEDIA CRITQUE COURSE CODE MAC 325 CONTRACT HOURS/CREDIT UNIT 3/

hrs/week 2

YEAR: 400 Semester: 2ND

Pre-requisite:

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THEORY

WEE

K

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 1.0 Know critical thinking

THEORETICAL CONTENT

PRACTICAL

CONTENT

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher Activities Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Resources Evaluation

1.1 Define critical thinking

1.2 Identify characters of

critical thinking

1.3 Explain stages of critical

thinking

- Explain critical

writing

- Explain Role of

writing

observation n

critical writing

Books

Radio

Programme

TV Programme

engage in critique

writing and

thinking

Take students

through a

critique

thinking

Give group

and

individuals

assignments

Evaluate

assignments

265

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 2.0 Know critical thinking

2.1 Explain critical writing

2.2 Explain the role of insight

and observation and

critical writing

2.3. Undertake exercises in

critical writing

2.4 Explain setting, structure and

technique

2.5 State different types of

character

2.6 List methods of character

portrayal

- Guide students on

how to do critical

writing /Review

Print Articles Print, Video and

broadcast

GENERAL OBJECTIVE : 3.0 Understand the purpose of critical writing

3.1 Identify samples of C.W.

3.2 Explain purpose of C.W.

3.3 Evaluate C.W.

- Explain various types

of critique/Review

-

Film Clips Materials Repeat

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 4.0 Understand kinds of media critiques/review

4.1 List types of media critique

4.2 identify elements of each

type of M.C.

4.3 Explain structures of types of

media

4.4 Analyse the structure of a

play

4.5 State the differences between

a novel and a play

- Explain types of

media critique

- Help students identify

types

- Projectors

- Computers

- Magazines

- - Repeat

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 5.0 Know how to write critique/Review

5.1 Write media critique/ for

print, film, broadcast

&online

5.2 Evaluate critique above.

- Use samples of film,

video, print

materials to

explain process of

critique

Repeat - Repeat Repeat

266

PROGRAMME: MASS COMMUNICATION HND I

COURSE TITLE: ADVERTISING CAMPAIGN AND EXECUTION

COURSE CODE: 326

DURATION: 3 HOURS/WEEKS

GOAL: This course is designed to acquaint the student with the different roles played by the key actors in the planning and

execution of advertising campaigns. It is also aimed at getting the student to practice how to play these roles.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

1.0 Know the key functions or stages in advertising campaign planning and execution

1.1 Know what planning entails

1.2 Know how to set campaign objectives

1.3 Know advertising budgeting

1.4 Know what the preparation function entails

1.5 Know what the placing functions entails

1.6 Know how to prepare and present advertising campaigns

1.7 Know how to evaluate advertising campaigns

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

COURSE: ADVERTISING CAMPAIGN AND

EXECUTION

COURSE CODE MAC 326 CONTRACT HOURS/CREDIT UNIT 3/

hrs/week 2

YEAR: 400 Semester: 2ND

Pre-requisite:

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THEORY

WEE

K

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 1.0 Know the key functions or stages in advertising campaign planning and execution

267

THEORETICAL CONTENT

PRACTICAL

CONTENT

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher Activities Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Resources Evaluation

1.1 Identify the key functions

in campaign planning and

execution

1.2 Clearly describe functions

in 1.1. above

- Explain advertising

campaign planning

and execution

- Explain what

planning entails

- Identify preparation

function

- plan

advertisement

campaign

- Draw up

budgets

-Supervise

relevant planning

sections

Guide students

through the

planning and

execution

advertisement,

campaign

- Draw up budgets

and

- Supervise relevant

planning sections

- Digital

- Classroom

- Vehicle

Computers

- Execute mock

campaigns

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 2.0 Know what planning entails

2.1 Identify the key actor at the

planning stage of

advertising campaign

2.2 Conduct relevant researches

2.3 Describe the key elements in

the planning process, viz,

selecting an advertising

agency, preparing an

advertising brief,

determining the

appropriate advertising

budget, proposing a date

plan for the various

activities.

2.4 Explain how to select an

agency

2.5 Explain the key points in a

typical advertising brief,

viz, product

- Explain placing

- Explain campaign

preparation and

presentation

- What is campaign

objectives

- Organise visits to

advertising agencies

Explain the key points

in a typical advertising

brief, viz, product

definition/formulation;

market, market size;

market shares. Target

consumers – their

beliefs and attitudes as

well as their cultural

traits; product‟s

- Evaluate their

campaigns

- Repeat

268

definition/formulation;

market, market size;

market shares. Target

consumers – their beliefs

and attitudes as well as

their cultural traits;

product‟s strengths and

weaknesses; distribution

channels, sales pattern

and/or breakdown by

region or month or

season; advertising

objectives; marketing

objectives, advertising

budget; date plan, etc.

2.6 Write an advertising brief.

strengths and

weaknesses;

distribution channels,

sales pattern and/or

breakdown by region

or month or season;

advertising objectives;

marketing objectives,

advertising budget

GENERAL OBJECTIVE : 3.0 Know what the preparation functions entails

3.1 Describe the key actions

during preparation

3.2 Describe the key functions in

the preparation states, e.g.

copywriting, layouting,

finished artwork, colour

separation, printing,

recording, story board,

casting, location hunting,

shooting, editing etc.

3.3 Write copy of various media

for a consumer product or

service, e.g. poster,

magazine, radio, television,

point-of –sale etc.

3.4 Prepare required layouts

3.5 Prepare (or arrange the

preparation of) finished

artwork

Explain the key action

and functions in

the preparation

states, e.g.

copywriting,

layouting, finished

artwork, colour

separation,

printing,

recording, story

board, casting,

location hunting,

shooting, editing

etc.

Write copy of various

media for a

consumer product

or service, e.g.

poster, magazine,

Prepare required

layouts

Supervise

photography

session

Supervise radio

recording

and editing

Supervise film

shooting and

editing

Supervise the

printing of

Make students

Prepare

required

layouts

Supervise

photography

session

Supervise radio

recording and

editing

Supervise film

shooting and

editing

Supervise the

printing of

Printing studio Describe the

key functions

in the

preparation

states, e.g.

copywriting,

layouting,

finished

artwork,

colour

separation,

printing,

recording,

story board,

casting,

location

hunting,

shooting,

editing etc

269

3.6 Supervise photography

session

3.7 Supervise radio recording and

editing

3.8 Supervise film shooting and

editing

3.9 Supervise the printing of

posters and giveaways.

3.10 Draw up a detailed schedule

for the listed 3.9 above

actions

radio, television,

point-of –sale etc.

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 4. Know what the placing function entails

4.1 Define the placing function,

viz, selection of appropriate

media, planning the utilization of

each medium, marking

orders/bookings

4.2 Describe the key agency

factors involved in placing e.g.

media planners and buyers

4.3 Explain media planning

4.4 Describe the various media

planning tools, viz, media

data such as circulation,

readership/viewership

coverage, rates, and media

plans/schedules

4.5 Explain the strengths and

weaknesses of various media.

4.6 Prepare media plans or

schedules

4.7 Explain media buying

4.8 Explain the

peculiarities/problems in

media buying in Nigeria e.g.

Describe the key

agency factors

involved in placing

e.g. media planners

and buyers

Define the placing

function, viz,

selection of

appropriate media,

planning the

utilization of each

medium, marking

orders/bookings

Explain media

planning

Describe the various

media planning

tools, viz, media

data such as

circulation,

readership/viewers

hip coverage, rates,

and media

plans/schedules

270

lack of understanding on the

part of media owners;

difficulty in negotiating

special rates and terms.

Explain the strengths

and weaknesses of

various media.

Prepare media plans or

schedules

Explain media

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 5.0 Know how to prepare and present advertising campaigns

5.1 Prepare the parts of an

advertising campaign.

5.2 Prepare the whole of an

advertising campaign

5.3 Present an advertising

campaign

Explain the

advertisement

campaign. (part and

whole)

Newspapers, TV

and Radio

Prepare the

parts of an

advertising

campaign.

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 6.0 Know how to evaluate advertising campaigns (project work)

6.1 Evaluate the effectiveness of

an advertising campaign

through the design and

execution of appropriate

research.

Discuss the

effectiveness of an

advertising campaign

through the design and

execution of

appropriate research.

See the

effectiveness of

advertising

campaign in a

given advert

Evaluate the

effectiveness

of an

advertising

campaign

through the

design and

execution of

appropriate

research.

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 7.0 Know how to set campaign objectives

7.1 conduct campaign objectives

e.g. DAGMAR principles

7.2 Identify target audience

7.3 Establish campaign research

7.4 Conduct risk assessment

7.5 Determine the common study

7.6 Establish mounting evaluate

guidelines

What is campaign

objectives e.g.

DAGMAR

principles

7.2 Identify target

audience

7.3 Establish campaign

research

271

7.4 Conduct risk

assessment

7.5 Determine the

common study

7.6 Establish mounting

evaluate guidelines

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 8.0 Advertising Budget

8.1 Explain advertising budget

8.2 Determine the budget

allocation for each medium

MASS COMMUNICATION HND Course Code:

MAC 327

Contact Hours/Credit

Unit: 2

Subject/Course: MULTIMEDIA AND

ONLINE JOURNALISM 1

Theoretical: Hours/week

1

Year: HND 1

Semester: II

Pre-Requisite: Practical: Hours/week 1

GOAL: This course is designed to introduce the student to fundamentals and practice of Multimedia and Online Journalism

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

At the end of this course, students should:

12.0 Understand the concept of online journalism

13.0 Know the various technologies related to Online journalism practice

14.0 Know the elements of Online news stories and the essential tools required to create them

15.0 Know the various platforms (podscasts, blogs, webcasts etc) for online delivery of news contents

272

16.0 Understand the basics and nature of Web writing, teasers, articles, links, etc.

17.0 Know how to capture and create simple multimedia news contents for online presentation and delivery

18.0 Know the basic legal and ethical considerations of online publishing

Course: MULTIMEDIA

AND ONLINE

JOURNALISM 1

Course Code:

MAC 327

Contact Hours/credit Unit: 2

Theoretical: 1 Hours/Week

Year: HND 1

Semester: 2nd

Pre-Requisite: Practical: 1

Hours/week

General Objectives 1.0: Understand the concept of online journalism

Theoretical Content Practical Content

Week Specific Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’s activities Specific Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’s

activities

Resources Evaluation

1-3 1.4 Explain the meaning of

online journalism

1.5 Identify the

characteristics and

features of online

journalism.

1.6 Discuss the differences

and similarities between

online journalism and

broadcast journalism and

print journalism

Discuss the basics of

Internet technology

Discuss the concept

of online journalism,

especially as a

medium of reporting

and publishing news

Discuss the impact of

social media on news

No practical required NA Books Internet Quiz

273

publishing and the

traditional news

media

3 General Objectives 2.0: Know the various terminologies related to online journalism practice

7.1 Identify common

technologies peculiar to

online journalism such as

Online editor, Online

reporting, multimedia

newsroom, User

Generated Contents

(UGC), Citizen

Journalism, etc.

List the various

technologies related

to Online journalism

practice.

Explain each of these

terminologies

No practical required NA Textbooks

\journals

internet

Quiz

4-6 General Objectives 3.0: Know various elements used for Online news story telling and the tools required to create them

3.1 Identify the various

multimedia elements

such as audio slideshow,

info graphics, online

video and audio clips.

3.2 Identify the tools

required to create each of

these multimedia

elements.

Explain each of the

elements and tools as

contained in the

specific learning

outcomes, with

reference to

examples of Online

news websites.

Identify examples of these

elements and tools

Guide the

students to

identify these

elements and

tools

Textbooks

\journals

internet

Ask

students

questions

in class

274

7-9 General Objectives 4.0: Know the various platforms (podscasts, blogs, webcasts etc) for online delivery of news contents

4.1 Identify the various

platforms and methods

(podcasts, blogs,

webcasts, social

Networking Sites SNS

etc) for delivery of

online news contents.

4.2 Describe each of these

online news

methods/platforms.

List the various

platforms and explain

them

Show examples of these

platforms

Guide the

students to

identify these

platforms.

Textbooks

\journals

internet

Quiz

10 General Objectives 5.0: Understand the basics and nature of web writing teasers, articles, links etc

5.1 Describe the nature of

Web writing.

5.2 Identify the features

distinguishing web

writing from other types

of writing

Explain the nature

web writing

Explain the features

Show examples of Web

scripts

Give/show examples

Steer students to

the nature of

web writing

Lead students to

identify the

features

Audio

recording

devices video

Internet

Quiz

11-13 General Objectives 6.0: Know how to capture and create simple multimedia news contents for online presentation

6.1 Explain how to capture

and create the various

elements in 3.1 above,

using the tools

introduced in 3.2 above.

Discuss how to

capture and create

simple multimedia

news contents (using

software such as

audacity, windows,

Movies Maker,

Sound slides etc) for

capture and create simple

multimedia news contents

suitable for export to a

typical news

websites/platforms

Demonstrate

how to use tools

and software to

produce

multimedia

materials for

expert to online

platforms such

Give

assignment

Grade and

discuss

outcome in

class

275

online presentation

and delivery to

online platforms

as YouTube,

Podomatic

institution‟s

websites using

mobile devices

14 General Objectives 7.0: Know the basics legal and ethical considerations of online publishing

7.1 Discuss various legal and

ethical considerations of

online publishing

Explain legal and

ethical implications

of online publishing

No practical required NA Books

Journals

Internet

Quiz

assignment

Department/ Programme: MASS

COMMUNICATION/ HIGHER NATIONAL

DIPLOMA(HND)

Course Code: MAC 328

Contact Hours: 3

Subject/Course: TELEVISION PRODUCTION

TECHNIQUES

DURATION: 3

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE:

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours/week 1

Year: HND I Semester: 2

nd Pre-requisite: Practical: 2 hours /week

GOAL: This course is designed to upgrade the student‟s skill in the techniques of television production.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

1.0 Know the operational techniques of a television studio and equipment

2.0 Know how to operate the camera

3.0 Know how to write scripts for television programmes

276

4.0 Know how to use pictorial elements, set and graphics

5.0 Know how to use television light effectively

6.0 Understand how to produce different television programmes

7.0 Know how to undertake post production activities

PROGRAMME: MASS COMMUNICATION

COURSE: TELEVISION PRODUCTION

TECHNIQUES

COURSE CODE MAC 328 CONTRACT HOURS/CREDIT UNIT 3/

hrs/week 3

YEAR: 400 Semester: 2ND

Pre-requisite:

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THEORY

WEE

K

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 1.0: Know the operational techniques of a television studio and equipment

THEORETICAL CONTENT

PRACTICAL

CONTENT

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher Activities Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Resources Evaluation

1-2 1.1 Describe the vision mixer

1.2 Explain how to operate the

mixer

1.3 Explain the operation of

video recording and play

back systems

1.4 Explain the operation of

audio in television

Explain vision mixer

operation

Explain how to use

various video

recording/ playback

devices.

Operate the

vision mixer

Demonstrate the

operation of

video and audio

recording/playba

ck devices

Show students how

to operate the

vision mixer, video

and audio

recording/playback

devices

Vision mixer,

DVD

recorder/player

Quiz

Assignments

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 2.0: Know how to operate the camera

3 2.1 Explaincamera positioning

and movement.

2.2 Explain the steps involved in

setting up a camera

2.3 Explain shot composition and

camera movements that

Explain positioning of

camera

Identify steps involved

in stepping up a

camera.

Position camera

for a programme.

Demonstrate shot

composition

Demonstrate

camera positioning

Show camera stand

Cameras

Camera stands

Other TV studio

equipment

Quiz

Assignments

277

result in the shots

2.4 List reasons for using camera

stands

Explain shot

compositions.

List reasons for using

camera stand.

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 3.0: Know how to write scripts

4-5 3.1 Explain formats for different

television progrmmes

3.2 Describe the units of

information a TV scripts

should contain

3.3 Explain the TV news script

3.4 Explain the documentary

script

3.5 Explain how to write

television scripts for Drama,

variety show, magazine and

other programmes

- Identify the

elements of a

television script

and script formats

- List the units of

information for a

television script

- Describe the

television news

format

- Explain the

documentary and

other types of

script

Demonstrate

writing television

script for

different

programmes

Direct and guide

students to write

TV scripts for

different

programmes

Sample scripts Quiz

Assignments

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 4.0: Understand the use of pictorial elements: Sets and graphics

6-7 4.1 Explain the concept of

pictorial design

4.2 Discuss stage design

4.3 Use set and scenic elements

4.4 Explain the principle of

graphic design

4.5 Generate and use graphics

from computer – credits,

illustrations, etc

- Define and

explain pictorial

elements,

pictures and

illustrations

- Explain stage

design

- Explain set and

scenic elements

- Discuss graphic

design

- Use computer to

generate graphics

- Identify

pictorial

elements

- Demonstrate

stage design

- Generate

graphics

from

computer

- Guide

students

and

supervise

students to

generate

and use

graphics

- Computers

softwares

Assignments

Quizzes.

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 5.0; Know how to use television light effectively

278

8-10 5.1 Define television lighting.

5.2 Explain the reasons for

lighting for television

5.3 Explain the goals of

television lighting

5.4 Explain technical and non-

technical lighting

objectives

5.5 Explain the basic or three

point lighting steps.

5.6 Explain lighting levels

5.7 Discuss hard light, soft light,

spot and flood lights

5.8 Explain lighting operators

and directors.

5.9 Discuss types of lighting

instruments

- Define television

lighting

- Explain goals and

objectives of

lighting

- Explain the key light,

back light, and fill

light

- Explain light levels

and how they can

be set up

- Differentiate between

hard light, soft

light and fill light.

- Explain instrument

used to generate

different kinds of

television lights:

Fresnel spotlight

Ellipsoidal

spotlight , etc

Set up lights

for a

production

Operate the

lighting

instruments

Guide students to

set up light for a

typical production

and to operate the

different lighting

instruments

Lighting

instruments

Studio with

accompanying

equipment.

Give assignment

and grade

Quiz

279

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 6.0 Know how to produce different television programmes

11-13 6.1 Explain the steps involved in

producing a news

programme

6.2 Discuss the production of a

drama programme

6.3 Explain the documentary

production process.

6.4 Discuss the production of

magazine, variety, children‟s

and other programmes

- Explain how to make

a television news

programme

- Describe the

production

process of a

television drama

programme

- Explain the phases of

a TV

documentary and

the producers

role in each

phase.

- Explain how to make

the magazine

programme,

reality

programme,

variety

programmes etc.

- Organise for

programme

production

- Produce news,

drama,

documentary,

reality and other

programmes

- Guide students to

produce

programmes in

groups

- Cameras,Visio

n mixer, studio

and mobile

lights.

- Audio and

video records

Group

production

assignments

GENERAL OBJECTIVE 7.0: Know how to undertake post-production activities

14-15 7.1 Define post

production

7.2 Explain the need

for post

production

7.3 Identify the

activities involved

in post-production

– video editing,

audio editing,

colour correction

of video clips,

selection of

- Define post-

production.

- Explain why

post-production

is done

- List and explain

the activities

involved in

post-production

- Explain video

and audio

Identify post-

production

activities.

Carry –out video

and audio editing

Show students

how to carry out

the practical

production task

in the

performance

activities.

Computers

with

appropriate

softwares.

Editing suites

Video and

audio consoles

Give practical

video and

editing

assignments

280

background

music, creation of

special effects,

dubbing

Explain video

editing

7.4 Explain Audio

editing.

7.5 Explain colour

correction of

video clips.

7.6 Discuss

background music

7.7 Edit video

editing

- Explain the

need for colour

correction

- Discuss

background

music and its

application in

post-production

- Perform video

editing.

Department/ Programme: HIGHER

NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS

COMMUNICATION

Course Code:

MAC 329

Contact Hours: 3

Subject/Course: ADVANCED EDITING DUCATION: 3

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE:

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours/week 1

2

Year: HND2Semester: 2

nd Pre-requisite: Practical: 1 hours /week

Goal: The course is designed to broader the student knowledge of the theory and practice of sub editing for newspaper and magazine it is a skill

course which requires quick and adequate news judgment. The emphasis in on precision, accuracy and clarity of copy presentation for publication

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course the student should: 1. Know the meaning of copy editing.

2. Understand the importance of copy editing.

281

3. Demonstrate competence in copy editing.

4. Know copy formats.

5. Understand the utility and importance of house style.

6. Know newspaper/ magazine make up and editing devices.

Course: : ADVANCED EDITING Course Code: MAC 329 Contact Hours

3:

Course Specification:

Year:

HNDII

Pre-requisite: - Practical: hours /week

Theoretical Content Practical

Content

General Objectives: 1.0 Know the meaning of copy editing.

Week Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/Practical)

Specific

Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Evaluation

1.1 Differentiate editing

from general to

specifics

1.2 Explain editing role,

and functions in

newspaper and

magazine production

1.3 Explain editing from

its general to specific

perspectives

1.4 Explain editing roles

and functions in

newspaper and

magazine production

Discuss the

various

definitions of

editing from

general to

specifics

Discuss the

roles and

functions of

editing in rud

and rug

Computers

Newspapers

Magazines

Find out

students

understanding

of the editing

concept, role

and functions

Guide students

to develop and

define own

definite of

editing

Assignment

Practical

editing

General Objectives: 2.0 Understand the importance of copy editing.

Importance

2.1 Identify editing

Identify and

demonstrate the

Computers

Newspapers

Students

identify tools

Guide students

in identification

Quizes

Assignment

282

symbols

2.2Use editing symbols

2.3 differentiate editing

symbols from proof

reading symbols

2.4 Identify editing tools

2.5 Use editing tools

symbols

2.6 Differentiate editing

tools symbols from

proofreading tools

symbols

uses of editing

tools/symbols

Show the

editing tools in

the computer

Magazines and their uses

Student

demonstrate

understanding

of the

differences in

the tools

of the tools

General Objectives: 3.0 Demonstrate competence in copy editing.

Competence

3.1 Edit copy for accuracy,

coherence, conciseness

clarity, and simplicity

3.2 Edit picture content

3.3 Edit picture for format

3.4 Edit picture for size

3.5 Edit copy to eliminate

verbosity,

circumlocution,

complexity,

grammatical

intricacies,

embellishment and

unnecessary elegance

Explain how a

copy is edited to

remove

Unwanted

Explain how to

edit pictures in

content

sentences and

syntax construt

Computer

Newspaper

Magazines

Demonstrate

editing ability

and how ability

to to edit

pictures in

content and

format

Guide students

to edit

newspapers and

magazines and

pictures

Practices in

editing

assignment

General Objectives: 4.0 Know copy format

Format

4.1 Identify spelling

mistakes

4.2 Slug stories

Discuss how

spelling

mistakes is

identified

Show how to

recognize

spelling,

sentences and

Guide students

identify errors

in sentence

construction

Practices in

editing

assignment

283

4.3 Apply computer copy

format symbols e.g

m/f,add one, add two etc

4.4 Identify typographical

errors in a copy

4.5 Identify bad sentences

construction in a copy

4.6 Identify poor syntaxes

in a copy

4.7 Review non-sequential

paragraphs in a copy

4.8 Re-arrange entire copy

for readability and quick

understanding

Identify errors in a copy

4,9 identify poor sentences

and syntax construct

Discuss

identification of

errors in a copy

including poor

other errors syntax and

other errors

General Objectives: 5.0 Understand the utility and importance of house style.

House Style

5.1 identify house style

format

5.2 use house style picture

guidelines

identify house

style format

Demonstrate the

use of house

style using

guidelines

House styles copies

and guidelines

Illustrate

different house

styles

Demonstrate

House styles

Guide students

on different

house and

usage

Identify paper

and their house

styles

General Objectives: 6.0 Know newspaper/ magazine make up and editing devices.

284

Department/ Programme: NATIONAL

DIPLOMA IN MASS COMMUNICATION

Course Code:

MAC 411

Contact Hours: 3

Subject/Course: REPORTING SCIENCE AND

TECHNOLOGY

DUCATION: 4

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE:

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours/week 1

Year: HND11 Semester: 1

ST Pre-requisite: Practical: 1 hours /week

GOAL: This course is designed to introduce the students to the use of science and technological information in writing news, features,

commentaries etc

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course the student should:

1.0 Understand science and technology

2.0 Know the uses of science and technology

3.0 Understand science and technology writing

4.0 Know the problem of science and technology reporting

5.0 Know scientific and technological terminologies

6.0 Know how to write science and technology news

7.0 Know how to interpret scientific and technological information

8.0 Know the importance of ICT in reporting science and technology

9.0 Know the use of science and technology in reporting environmental issues

Course: : REPORTING SCIENCE

AND TECHNOLOGY

Course Code: MAC 411 Contact Hours

4:

Course Specification:

Year:

HND11

Pre-requisite: - Practical: hours /week

Theoretical Content Practical

Content

General Objectives: 1.0 Understand science and technology

Week Specific Learning Teacher's Resources Specific Teacher's Evaluation

285

Outcome activities (Theoretical/Practical) Learning

Outcome

activities

Science and Technology

1.1 Define Science

1.2 Technology

1.3 Distinguish between

science and technology

1.4 List the various types

of science e.g.

Physical and Applied

science

1.5 Explain the importance

of science and

technology

1.6 Identify various fields

of science e.g.

Biology, Chemistry,

Mathematics etc.

1.7 Identify various fields

of technology e.g.

computer space

technology etc.

Discuss science

and technology

Explain uses of

science and

technology in

reporting

Textbooks

Journals

Newspapers

Magazines

Internet

Introduce

students to the

use of science

and technology

in writing news,

commentary

etc.

Guide students

to identify the

uses of science

and technology

reporting to

science and

technologies for

their medias

Give

assignment on

science and

technology

department

General Objectives: 2.0 Know the uses of science and technology

Uses

2.1 Identify the application

of science and

technology

2.2 Identify the application

State the scope

of science and

technology

List problems

of science and

BOOKS,

INTERNETS

What is

science and

technology

How are the

two related

286

of science and

technology in industry

2.3 Highlight the

application of science

and technology in

importation

2.4 Explain the application

of science and

technology in

communication e.g.

radio, television,

telephone, printing etc

2.5 Explain the

application of science

and technology in

other human endeavor

technology

reporting and

the solutions

Identify science

and technology

Terminologies

Demonstrate

how to write

science and

technology

reports

Generate a

format for

science and

technology

report

General Objectives: 3.0 Understand science and technology writing

Writing

3.1 Define science and

technology writing

3.2 Outline the scope of

science and technology

reporting

Interpret some

scientific and

technological

break through

Explain

technologies of

interview

List the

importance of

ICT in science

and technology

reporting

General Objectives: 4.0 Know the problem of science and technology reporting

287

Problems

4.1 Enumerate the

problems of science

and technology

4.2 List solutions to the

problems in science

and technology e.g.

use of reservation, use

of library, use of

laboratory, internet etc.

Define

environment

Identify

environmental

issues and the

use of science

and

environmental

reporting

General Objectives: 5.0 Know scientific and technological terminologies

Scientific Terminologies

5.1 Use appropriate

science and technology

terminologies

associated with

industry,

transportation,

communication etc.

List out the Use

of some

terminologies

associated with

industry,

transportation,

communication

in science and

technology

General Objectives: 6.0 Know how to write science and technology news

Science/Technology

News

6.1 Identify sources of

science and technology

news

6.2 Write science and

technology news and

features e.g.

telecommunication,

aviation, health, space

expenditure etc.

Explain the

features of

Science and

Technology e.g

telecommunicati

on, aviation,

health, space

expenditure etc.

288

General Objectives: 7.0 Know how to interpret scientific and technological information

Interpretation of

information

6.1 Explain the

applications of science

and technology to the

audience

6.2 Conduct interviews

with experts in the

various discipline of

science and technology

6.3 Explain the results of

scientific and

technological

discoveries

6.4 Relate scientific

findings and

technological treat to

human affairs

Discuss the

applications of

science and

technology to

the audience

Discuss the

discoveries of

scientific and

technological

findings and

technological

treat to human

affairs

Conduct interviews

with experts in the

various discipline of

science and

technology

Guide students

to practice

interviews with

experts in the

various

discipline of

science and

technology

Microphones,

Audience

Explain the

applications of

science and

technology to

the audience

Relate scientific

findings and

technological

treat to human

affairs

General Objectives: 8.0 Know the importance of ICT in reporting science and technology

Science and technology

reporting, and ICT

8.1 Explain ICT

8.2 Explain ICT in

science and

technology reporting

Discuss ICT

Explain ICT in

science and

technology

reporting

See components of

ICT

Show

components of

ICT

Facilities used

in ICT

Explain ICT in

science and

technology

reporting

General Objectives: 9.0 Know the use of science and technology in reporting environmental issues

9.1 Define environment

9.2 Explain the role of

science and technology

Discuss

environment

and its role in

science and

Examine the role of

science and

technology in

reporting

Watch the role

of science and

technology in

reporting

Audience ,

public places

State the use of

science and

technology in

reporting

289

DEPARTMENT/PROGRAMME:

NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS

COMMUNICATION

Course Code: MAC

412

Contact Hours: 4

Subject/Course: EDITORIAL

WRITING

DUCATION: 4

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE:

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours/week

1 2

Year: HND II Semester: 1st Pre-requisite: Practical: 1 hours/week

GOAL: This course is designed to expose the student to the general principles and practices of writing in-depth

comments, such as editorials and columns

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course the student should:

1.0 Understand the structure of an editorial

2.0 Understand the nature of persuasion

3.0 Understand the functions of an editorial in the media

4.0 Know the effects of editorials on readers, viewers and listeners

5.0 Understand the strategies of editorial writing

6.0 Understand the emergence and functions of editorial board

7.0 Understand the nature and purposes of columns

8.0 Know how to write columns

in reporting

environmental issues

technology in

reporting

environmental

issues

environmental issues environmental

issues

environmental

issues

290

COURSE: EDITORIAL

WRITING

Course Code: MAC 412

Contact

Hours:

Course Specification:

Year: Pre-requisite: Practical: hours/week

Theoretical content Practical content

General Objectives: 1.0 Understand the nature of an editorial

Week Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher‟s

Activities

Resources

(Theoretical/Practical)

Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher‟s

Activities

Evaluation

Editorial Structure

1.1. Define Editorial.

1.2. Describe the three

main parts of an

editorial viz

introduction, body

and conclusion.

1.3. State the qualities of

a good editorial.

1.4. Compare the

structure of an

editorial with those

of the other kinds of

Explain the

components of

an editorial and

compare its

structure from

other

journalistic

writings.

Identify and

explain qualities

of a good

Textbook, Newspaper

and internet

Editorial cuttings

in Newspaper and

magazines

Develop ideas for

editorials

Write editorials

Analyse and

grade

Newspaper

cuttings

Illustrate how

issues can

form ideas

for editorials

Grade the

cuttings

Quiz and

assignment

291

journalistic writings

e.g. straight news,

features, interviews

etc.

editorial.

Discuss what

makes the

editorial

different from

other

journalistic

writings.

Assess

samples of

editorials

presented by

students

Assignment

General Objectives: 2.0 Understand the nature of persuasion

Persuasion

Define Persuasion.

2.2 Persuasion relevant to

journalism

2.3 Identify the different

theories of persuasion

e.g cognitive

dissonance, selectivity

theory etc.

2.4 Analyse the role of

persuasions in

commentaries and

editorials

2.5 State the strengths and

limitations of

persuasion in

commentaries and

Explain the

functions of

persuasion in

editorial

Distinguish

between

editorial and

opinion articles

Evaluate the

effectiveness of

persuasion in

editorials.

Demonstrate

various

“ “ “

Text books,

Newspapers and

internet

Newspaper

Editorial cuttings

for the purpose of

identifying

strengths,

limitations of

persuasion in

editorials.

Newspaper

Editorial cuttings

to indentify the

use of persuasion

in Editorial and

Grade student

participation in

discussion

Quiz and

assignment

292

other forms of

editorial

2.6 Distinguish between

persuasion, editorials

and other

commentaries e.g.

expository narrative,

argumentative and

commendation.

2.7 Discuss trends in

editorial writing in

Nigeria.

approaches to

editorials.

commentaries.

Bring in

editorial

samples for

discussion

General Objectives: 3.0 Understand the functions of an editorial in the media

Functions

3.1 Outline the main

functions of

editorials.

3.2 Explain how the main

functions interrelate.

3.3 Distinguish between

an editorial as opinion

expression and non

opinion type

journalistic.

Explain the

function

editorial

explain each

function and

how they

interact

Differentiate

between

editorial as

opinion

expression and

Newspapers

Opinion and non-

opinion editorial

cuttings from

newspapers for

discussion

Share

samples of

editorial as

opinion and

non-opinion

type

Asses student

participation

Assignment

293

non opinion

type

General Objectives: 4.0 Know the effects of editorials on readers, viewers and listeners

4.1 Determine the

audience for

editorial.

4.2 Explain the impact of

editorial.

4.3 Evaluate the

effectiveness of

editorials in Nigeria.

4.4 Compare the

effectiveness of

editorials in Nigeria

with the situations in

other countries of the

world.

Enumerate the

different kinds

of editorials and

the target

audience.

Explain the

target audience

for editorial and

the

effectiveness of

the editorials

Conduct audience

survey

Analyse results of

survey

audience Guide the

result of survey

General Objectives: 5.0 Understand the strategies of editorial writing

Strategies

5.1 Describe the various

approaches to

editorial writing e.g.

satire expressive,

objective, and

Explain the

approaches to

editorial writing

and pros and

cons.

Practice the

approaches to editorial

writing and pros and

cons.

Guide students to

practice the

approaches to

editorial writing

and pros and cons.

Writing

materials

Explain the

approaches to

editorial

writing and

pros and cons.

294

subjective, etc.

5.2 State the purposes

which the various

approaches to

editorial writing are

meant to serve.

5.3 Evaluate the various

approaches to

editorial writing for

their relative

effectiveness.

Discuss the

objective of

each approach

to editorial

writing

Examine the

effectiveness of

each approach

General Objectives: 6.0 Understand the emergence and functions of the editorial board

Editorial Board

6.1 Define the editorial

board

6.2 Explain the

composition of the

editorial board.

6.3 Explain the

emergence of the

editorial board in

Nigeria

6.4 Explain the functions

of the editorial

board.

6.5 Analyse the

advantages and

disadvantages of an

editorial board

Define editorial

board

Explain the

editorial board,

its composition.

Explain the

functions of the

editorial board.

Explain the

composition of

the editorial

Explain the

composition of

the editorial

board

295

board

Explain the

functions,

advantages and

disadvantages

of the Editorial

Board.

General Objectives: 7.0 Understanding the nature and purpose of columns

Columns

7.1 Define a column

7.2 Analyse main kinds

of columns, e.g.

syndicated, in house,

and quest columns.

7.3 Distinguish between a

column and an

editorial.

7.4 State the roles of

columns in magazines

and newspapers.

7.5 Evaluate columns

published in the

Nigeria

7.6 Explain specialization

in column writing

Explain the

term column.

Identify

different types

of columns.

Differentiate a

column from

editorial.

Distinguish

between

editorial and

Analyse personal

columns from

newspapers and

magazines

cuttings.

Supervise the

process

Grade the

cuttings and

participation.

296

7.7 State the qualities of a

good columnist, e.g.

being authoritative,

being credible and

having a good style.

columns

identity roles of

a column

Differentiate the

specialist from

the generalist

indentify and

explain the

qualities of a

good columnist

General Objectives: 8.0 Know how to write column

Column Writing

8.1 Write columns on

various issues e.g.

religion, sports,

politics, women,

children, science,

education, conflicts

corruption

Explain the

process of

writing columns

in religion,

sports etc.

Establish a writing

pattern for column

Share column

samples

Guide

students write

editorials and

columns

Give

assignment

Grade the

columns

assignment

297

on column

writing

Course: : MEDIA

ORGINASATION AND

MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MAC 413 Contact Hours

3:

Course Specification:

Year:

HNDII

Pre-requisite: - Practical: 1 hours /week

Semester: 2nd

Theoretical Content: 1 Practical

Content

General Objectives: 1.0 Comprehend the various philosophies and theories of organization and management

Week Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/Practical)

Specific

Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Evaluation

Philosophies and theories

1.1 Define determination

of media organization

and management

1.2 Identify the various

philosophies and

theories

1.3 Management review:

planning, budgeting,

coordination etc

Define

management

Explain

philosophies of

management

Explain

organogram of a

typical media

outfit

Books

Journals

Internet

A typical media of

organisation

Show what a

typical media

management

structure is

Grade students

to appreciate

various

management

structures in the

media

Assess

organisational

media by

students

General Objectives: 2.0 Know the different structural characteristics of the mass media

Structural

Characteristics

Explain

Meet core staff,

Take students

newspaper or

Give and assess

assignments

298

2.1 Describe the structural

organization for a

typical magazine or

newspaper.

2.2 Explain how to

organize or structure

typical media

organizations

2.3 Explain how to

organise book

publishing, public

relations and

advertising agencies

2.4 Prepare an organogram

for any of these media

organisations

personnel

management in

the media

emphasizing

division within

the outfit

Identify the

department in

the print media

and their

relationship

Explain inter

dependent of

departments in a

typical

newspaper

Explain the

various policies

in newspaper

establishments

Identify sources

of funds in a

newspaper

organization

Identify revenue

in newspaper

technology and

magazine

ancillary staff in

media houses

See them at work in

the departments in a

typical print media

State the relationship

among departments in

a newspaper

Show sources of

revenues for a

newspaper or

magazine

to

Meet core

staff, ancillary

staff in media

houses

See them at

work in the

departments in

a typical print

media

State the

relationship

among

departments in

a newspaper

Show sources

of revenues for

a newspaper or

magazine

magazine

Quiz on

management of

departmental

newspapers

Quiz on team

work

Assignment

Grade and

return

Quiz and grade

and trturn

General Objectives: 3.0 Know personnel management principles

Personnel Management

3.1 Identify the different

Identify the

Visit the different

Pay a visit to

Magazines and

Explain how to

299

departments in a

newspaper house

Identify the different

departments in a

newspaper house

3.2 Explain how to

manage personnel in

media organizations,

eg, editorial, technical

and administrative

staff

different

departments in a

newspaper

house.

departments in a

newspaper house

Identify the different

departments in a

newspaper house

Explain how to

manage personnel in

media organizations,

eg, editorial, technical

and administrative

staff

the different

departments in

a newspaper

house Identify

the different

departments in

a newspaper

house

Explain how to

manage

personnel in

media

organizations,

eg, editorial,

technical and

administrative

staff

newspaper

house

manage

personnel in

media

organizations,

eg, editorial,

technical and

administrative

staff

General Objectives: 1.0

General Objectives: 4.0 Understand the organizational structure of the print meida

Print Media

Organisation

4.1 Identify the different

departments in a

magazine

establishment

4.2 State how the various

departments relate to

each other

4.3 Explain the

organisational

structure of each

department

Identify the

different

departments in a

magazine

establishment

State how the

various

departments

relate to each

other

Visit the different

departments in a

magazine

establishment

State how the various

departments relate to

each other

Pay a visit to

the different

departments in

a magazine

establishment

State how the

various

departments

relate to each

other

Magazine

house

List the

different

departments in a

magazine

establishment.

Explain their

functions

300

General Objectives: 5.0 Understand general communication in print media management

General

Communication(print)

5.1 Explain interpersonal

communication in

print media

management

5.2 Define group

dynamics in print

media management

5.3 Explain

communication lines

in print media

organisations

Explain

interpersonal

communication

in print media

management

Define group

dynamics in

print media

management

Explain

communication

lines in print

media

organisations

No practical required Media house Explain

interpersonal

communication

in print media

management

General Objectives: 6.0 Understand print media logistics

Print Media Logistics

6.1 Explain various

newspaper and

magazine policies.

6.2 State the principles of

management relevant

to newspaper and

magazine production

6.3 Outline the strategy of

funding newspapers

and magazines

Explain various

newspaper and

magazine

policies.

State the

principles of

management

relevant to

newspaper and

magazine

production

Outline the

strategy of

funding

newspapers and

magazines

newspapers and

magazines

Explain

newspaper and

magazine

policies

301

General Objectives: 7.0 Know revenue sources in print media operation

Revenue Sources(Print)

0.1 State the functions of

the advertising

department

0.2 State the functions of

the circulation

department

0.3 Identify other sources

of revenue for the print

media

0.4 Explain the cost

reduction techniques in

newspaper and

magazine production

0.5 Explain the

relationship between

media houses and

commercial

establishments

Enumerate the

functions of the

advertising

department,

circulation

department,

sources of

revenue for the

print media,

Explain the cost

reduction

techniques in

newspaper and

magazine

production

Explain the

relationship

between media

houses and

commercial

establishments

newspaper and

magazine

Explain

functions of the

following:

advertising

department,

circulation

department,

what are the

sources of

revenue for the

print media

General Objectives: 8.0 Understand the organisational structure of the broadcast media

Broadcast Media

Organisation

8.1 Identify the

departments in a radio

station.

8.2 Identify the different

departments in a

television station

List the

departments in a

radio station.

and

television

station

Visit a radio house

See the departments

in a radio station.

Visit a television

house

Guide students

in a Visit to

radio house

See the

departments in

a radio station.

Radio and

television house

List the various

departments in

television and

radio house.

Explain how

they relate to

each other

302

8.3 State how the various

departments relate to

each other

8.4 Explain the

organisatinal structure

of each department

State how the

various

departments

relate to each

other

Explain the

organizational

structure of each

department

See the different

departments in a

television station

Distinguish how the

various departments

relate to each other

Illustrate the

organizational

structure of each

department

Visit a

television house

See the

different

departments in

a television

station

Distinguish

how the various

departments

relate to each

other

Illustrate the

organizational

structure of

each

department

General Objectives: 9.0 Understand general communication in broadcast media management

General Communication

(Broadcast)

9.1 Explain interpersonal

communication in

broadcast media

management.

9.2 Define group

dynamics in broadcast

media management

9.3 Explain

communication lines

in broadcast media

management

9.4 Assess group influence

Explain

interpersonal

communication

in broadcast

media

management.

Define group

dynamics in

broadcast media

management

Explain

communication

broadcast

media house

Explain

interpersonal

communication

in broadcast

media

management

303

in broadcast media

organizations

lines in

broadcast media

management

General Objectives:10 Understand broadcast media logistics

Broadcast Media

Logistics

10.1Explain various

broadcast media

policies.

10.2State principles of

programming in

management

10.3Analyse the strategy

of timing in

programmes

Explain various

broadcast media

policies.

And principles

of programming

in management

Explain various

broadcast media

policies

General Objectives:11 Know revenue sources in broadcast media operation

Revenue Sources

(Broadcast)

1.1 State the functions

of the commercial

department

1.2 Explain the

relationship between

media houses and

commercial

establishment

1.3 Identify other sources

of revenue for the

station

1.4 Explain cost reduction

techniques in

production

State the

functions of the

commercial

department

Explain the

relationship

between media

houses and

commercial

establishment

Identify other

sources of

revenue for the

commercial

department

State the

functions of the

commercial

department

304

Department/ Programme: HIGHER

NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS

COMMUNICATION

Course Code:

MAC 414

Contact Hours: 3

Subject/Course: COMMUNITY

JOURNALISM AND COMMUNITY

BROADCASTING

DUCATION: 5

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE:

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours/week 1

2

Year: HND2Semester: 1ST Pre-requisite: Practical: 1 hours /week

GOAL: this course is designed to expose the students to grassroots journalism and broadcasting

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course the student should:

1.0 Understand the basic difference between urban journalism and community journalism

2.0 Know the various techniques of community newspaper production

3.0 Understand the structure and organization of a community newspaper

4.0 Know the design and content of a community newspaper

5.0 Understand the basic strategies of circulation and marketing of community newspapers

6.0 Know the various techniques of community radio and television production

7.0 Know the major structure and organization of a community radio/television station

8.0 Know the basic strategies of disseminating community news on radio and television

station

Explain cost

reduction

techniques in

production

305

Course: : COMMUNITY

JOURNALISM AND

COMMUNITY BROADCASTING

Course Code: MAC 414 Contact Hours

4:

Course Specification:

Year:

HND1I

Pre-requisite: - Practical: hours /week

Theoretical Content Practical

Content

General Objectives: 1.0 Understand the basic difference between urban journalism and community journalism

Week Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/Practical)

Specific

Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Evaluation

Urban and community

Journalism

1.1 List the major

characteristics of a

community setting

1.2 Identify the cultural

pattern of a community

1.3 Describe the

organizational,

structural and

administrative pattern

of a community

1.4 Identify a viable

community for a

community newspaper

1.5 Describe the grassroots

information seeker,

information carrier,

information indifferent

Discuss the

cumulative

major

characteristics

of a community

setting

Identify the

cultural pattern

of a community

Describe the

organizational,

structural and

administrative

pattern

major

characteristics

of a community

Books

Internet

TV/Radio

facilities

Magazines

306

and rumor carrier

1.6 Explain the role of the

opinion and

community lead.

1.7 APPRECIATES the

basic of hyper local

journalism

1.8 Understand the basic

differences between

urban and community

journalism

setting

Identify the

cultural pattern

of a community

Describe the

organizational,

structural and

administrative

pattern

General Objectives: 2.0 Know the various techniques of community newspaper production

Production techniques

2.1 Cache and process

community news for

production.

2.2 Explain the production

process in community

newspaper

Explain urban

and community

journalism and

their differences

Explain the

process and

307

2.3 Expalin the production

process production in

radio/tv

2.4 LIST the various

techniques of community

newspaper production

techniques of

producing print

and broadcast

General Objectives: 3.0 Understand the structure and organization of a community newspaper

Structure and

Organisation

3.1 List the major divisions

of community

newspaper

3.2 Describe the functions

of the editor and other

staff of the community

newspaper

3.3 Identify revenue

sources for the

community newspaper

of a community

newspaper

3.4 EXPLAIN the

structure and

organization

3.5 LIST the various

techniques of

community radio and

televisions

Explain the

various depts.

And functions

of staff

Describe the

functions of the

editor and other

staff of the

community

newspaper

Identify

revenue sources

for the

community

newspaper of a

community

newspaper

3.6 Expain the

structure

and

organization

LIST the

various

techniques of

community

radio and

General Objectives: 4.0 Know the design and content of a community newspaper

308

Design and Content

4.

Explain the

content of a

newspaper e.g.

printer pictures

Identify the target

audience for internal

disseminations market

days, festivals heads

of community

Student should

be at the field

i.e the

community and

production

programme in

either print or

broadcast

General Objectives: 5.0 Understand the basic strategies of circulation and marketing of community newspapers

Circulation and

Marketing

5.1 Identify the market

festivals, community

centres, sports centres,

etc in a given local

government area

5.2 Identify all heads of

cultural and/or social

organizations in the

community

5.3 Gather members of the

community in the

production and

recirculation the

community newspaper

5.4 List the basic

strategies of

circulations and

marketing of

community newspapers

Identify the

market festivals,

community

centres, sports

centres, etc in a

given local

government

area dentify all

heads of

cultural and/or

social

organizations in

the community

Gather

members of the

community in

the production

and

recirculation the

community

newspaper

Understand the

basic strategies

of

News paper

Explain process

involve in

production and

circulation of

community

newspaper

General Objectives: 6.0 Know the various techniques of community radio and television production

Radio/TV Production List the Prepare

309

Techniques

6.1 List the equipment for

a community radio and

television station e,g

ralay devices studios,

etc.

6.2 Analyse the

presentation of

community radio

programmes.

6.3 Analyse the

presentation of

community television

programmes

6.4 Explain the concept of

localization of news in

a community

radio/television

6.5 Gather community

news

6.6 Process community

news for production

6.7 Prepare commentaries

and documentaries for

a community

radio/television station

equipment for a

community

radio and

television

station e,g ralay

devices studios,

etc.

Analyse the

presentation of

community

television

programmes

Explain the

concept of

localization of

news in a

community

radio/television

Gather

community

news

Process

community

news for

production

commentaries

and

documentaries

for a

community

radio/television

station

Prepare

commentaries

and

documentaries

for a

community

radio/television

station

General Objectives: 7.0 Know the major structure and organization of a community radio/television station

Organisational Structure

7.1 Describe the functions

of the community radio

producer..

7.2 Describe the functions

of other staff of the

community radio

Explain the

structure and

organization of

a broadcast

station

Describe the

broadcast

station

LIST the major

structure and

organization of

a community

radio/television

station

310

station

7.3 Describe the functions

of the community

television producer

7.4 Describe the functions

of other staff of the

community television

station

7.5 LIST the major

structure and

organization of a

community

radio/television station

functions of

other staff of

the community

radio station

Describe the

functions of the

community

television

producer

Describe the

functions of

other staff of

the community

television

station

General Objectives: 8.0 Know the basic strategies of disseminating community news on radio and television

Dissemination Strategies

8.1 Identify the markets,

market days, festivals,

community centres,

sports centres etc in a

given local community

8.2 Identify all heads of

cultural and/or social

organizations in the

community

8.3 Involve members of

the community in radio

and television

programmes

8.4 Use news reels for

community

broadcasting

8.5 Apply the various radio

Identify the

markets, market

days, festivals,

community

centres, sports

centres etc in a

given local

community

Identify all

heads of

cultural and/or

social

organizations in

the community

Identify the

markets, market

days, festivals,

community

311

Department/Programme: Mass Communication/HND Course Code: MAC 418 Contact Hours/credit unit: 2

and television

production techniques

to the dissemination of

community news

8.6 The impact of news in

our community e.g

hypertocal journalism

that should produce a

country newspaper

8.7 Explain the importance

of community

journalism ie print and

broadcasting.

8.8 Show samples of

country newspaper

centres, sports

centres etc in a

given local

community

8.9 Identify all

heads of

cultural

and/or

social

organization

s in the

community

Identify the

markets, market

days, festivals,

community

centres, sports

centres etc in a

given local

community

Identify all

heads of

cultural and/or

social

organizations in

the community

312

Subject/Course: Multimedia and Online Journalism II Theoretical: Hours/week 1

Year: II Semester: First Pre-requisite: MAC 328 Practical: hours/week: 1

GOAL: The course is a follow-up to Multimedia and Online journalism I and is designed to enhance students‟skills in the practice of

multimedia and online journalism.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course students should:

1) Know how to report, produce and edit using blogs, audio, video, photos, infographics, digital maps and social media for journalistic purposes

2) Understand the the techniques of advance Internet research including how to use materials from news archives, databses and public records

3) Know how to use social media for journalistic purposes

4) Understand the legal, economic professional and ethical considerations of publishing news online

5) Know various positions and career opportunities in multimedia and online journalism practice.

313

COURSE: Multimedia Online Journalism II COURSE CODE: MAC 415 CONTACT HOURS: 2

Theoretical: 1 hours/week

Practical: 1 hours/week

Year:HND II Semester: I Prequisite: MAC 328

General Objectives: 1.0 Know how to report, produce and edit using blogs, audio, video, photos, infographics, digital maps and social

media for journalistic purposes

6) THEORETICAL CONTENT 7) PRACTICAL CONTENT

Week Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher’s Activities Specific

Learning

Outcomes

Teacher’s

activities

Resources Evaluation

1-3 1.0 PRACTICE how to report , produce,

and edit using blogs, infograohics, digital

maps and social media for journalistics

purposes

1.1 Identify online publishing tools

1.2 Discuss the practice and process of

blogging

1.3 Explain how to use blogs, digital maps,

and other multimedia contents for news

reporting.

Define blog

Explain the steps

involved in blog

creation, publication

and and optimization

Discuss the use of

multimedia contents

news reporting

Create and

publish blogs

with multimedia

contents

Guide

student to

create and

publish blogs

Books

Internet

Digital

Audio/

Video

devices

Quiz

Assignments

314

Week 8) General Objective 2.0: Understand the the techniques of advance internet research including how to use materials

9) from news archives, databses and public records

4-6 2.1 Explain internet research

2.2 Identify tools used for Internet research

2.3 Define search engines

2.4 Explain the uses of serach engines

2.5 Explain databases

2.6 Discuss how to use databases as a

reporting tool

Discuss Internet research

Identify Internet research

tools

Define search engines

Explain how to use search

engines

Define databases

Explain how to use databases

Use search

engines

use databases

Guide

students to

use search

engines

Guide

students to

use databases

Internet

Assignments

Assignments

Quiz

7-10 General Objective 3.0: Know how to use Social Media for journalistic purposes

3.1 Explain social Media

3.2 Discuss how to use Social Media

to publish real-time news

updates/breaking news

3.3 Discuss how to use Social Media

to connect and engage the audience

Define Social Media

Explain how to use Social

Media to source for news

stories and sources

Explain how use social

media to publish news

Expalin how Discuss how to

use Social Media to engage

Use Social Media to

source for news

Use social media to

publish news

Apply Social media

in engaging the

audience

Guide students to

use social media

to source and

publish news

Guide students in

using social

media

Internet Assignments

Quiz

315

the audience

11 4.0. Understand the legal, economic, professional and ethical considerations of publishing news online

4.1 EXAMINE legal issues in publishing news

online

4.2 IDENTIFY the ethical considerations of

online publishing

4.3 ENUMERATE economic, social and

professional conisderations of multimedia and

online journalism

Discuss legal issues related to

online publishing

Identify ethical issues realting to

online publishing

Explain the economic, social

and professional considerations

of Online publishing

Internet Assignments

Quiz

12-13 5.0 Know various positions and career opportunities in multimedia and online journalism practice

5.1 examine the structure of a typical

multimedia and online journalism organization

5.2 Identify various possitions in a multimedia

and online journalism organization

5.3 Identify career opportunities and job

prospects occasioned by the practice of

Describe the organogram of a of a typical

multimedia and online journalism

organization

Identify various possitions in a multimedia

and online journalism organization

List career opportunities and job

Internet Assignments

Quiz

Guided tour of a typical

of a typical multimedia

and online journalism

organization

316

PROGRAMME: MASS COMMUNICATION HND I

COURSE TITLE: ENVIRONMENTAL REPORTING

COURSE CODE: 416

DURATION: 3 HOURS/WEEKS

GOAL: This course is intended to develop and strengthen the students awareness and interest in reporting environmental issues.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course, the students should:

1.0 Understand the nature of the environment and human society

2.0 Understand environmental issues that promote human society

3.0 Understand media role in reporting human and environmental issues

4.0 Understand media advocacy in environmental sustainability and human development

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

COURSE: ENVIRONMENTAL REPORTING COURSE CODE MAC 322 CONTRACT HOURS/CREDIT UNIT 2/

hrs/week 3

YEAR: 400 Semester: 2ND

Pre-requisite:

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THEORY

WEE

K

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 1.0 Understand the nature of the environment and human society

multimedia and online journalism prospects occasioned by the practice of

multimedia and online journalism

317

THEORETICAL CONTENT

PRACTICAL

CONTENT

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher Activities Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Resources Evaluation

1-3 1.1 Define environment

1.2 Identify components of

the environment

1.3 Explain relationship

among components of the

environment

- Describes nature

of the

environment

Identify news

worthy elements

in environmental

issues

Describe the

environment and

the relationship of

its components.

- Books

- Internet

- Films

- Examine areas

of

environment

al issues

that are

worthy of

being

reported.Ass

ign

tasks/grade

marks

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 2.0 Understand the environmental issues that promote human society

4-7 2.1 examine key issues of

environmental concerns

to society e,g, climate

change, deforestation

2.2 Explain issues of

environmental concerns

to society

2.3 Explain the impact of the

issues on human society

Discuss environmental

concerns and their

impacts to

humanity.

Appreciate

environmental

issues and the

need to report

them.

- List key

issues of

environmen

tal concerns

to the

human

society

- Mounting

media

facilities

- Weather

meteorological

records

318

GENERAL OBJECTIVE : 3.0 Understand the media role in reporting human and environmental issues

8-10 3.1. Define surveillance functions

of the mass media

3.2 Explain relevant reportage

techniques for each issue

Explain surveillance

and other forms of

news gathering

techniques

Appreciate the

surveillance

function of the

mass media and

identify same

from samples of

reports presented.

Show samples

of reports where

this function of

the media was

emphasized

GENERAL OBJECTIVE: 4. Understand media advocacy in environmental sustainability and human development

11-13 4.1 Define advocacy

4.2 Explain media advocacy

Discuss

advocacy as it

relates to the

media

Write

advocacy

reports

Show samples of

such reports and

guide students to

know media

advocacy in

environmental

issues.

Past reports on

environmental

issues

Write advocacy

report on three

environmental

issues

Department/Programme:

Mass Communication /HND

Course Code: MAC 417 Contact Hours/credit unit: 2

Subject/Course: FILM PRODUCTION Theoretical: Hours/week 1

Year: II Semester: 2nd Pre-requisite: Practical: hours/week: 1

GOAL: The course is designed to introduce the students to elements and principles of film production, with emphasis on the basics of

film writing, directing, producing and editing.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

319

On completion of this course, the students should:

9.0 Know how filmography is different from the other types of audio-visual productions

10.0 Know the various equipment used in film production and how to operate them

11.0 Know the various personell involved in film production and their roles and functions

12.0 Understand the basic elements in scripting.

13.0 Understand the basic elements in producing.

14.0 Understand the basic elements in directing

15.0 Understand the basics of non-linear editing.

320

PROGRAMME: NATIONAL BOARD FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

COURSE: Film Production COURSE CODE MAC 417 CONTACT HOURS/CREDIT UNIT 2/

hrs/week 2

YEAR: HND 1 Semester: 2 Pre-requisite:

COURSE SPECIFIFCATION: THEORY

WEE

K

GENERAL OBJECTIVES 1.0 Know how filmography is different from the other types of audio-visual productions

THEORETICAL CONTENT PRACTICAL CONTENT

Specific Learning Outcome Teacher Activities Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher Activities Resources Evaluation

1-2 1.9 Explain film production

1.10 Identify elements that

distinguish film production

from other types of audio-

visual production

1.11 Describe the

evolution and beginning of

film production

1.12 Discuss the

development of film

production in Nigeria

Discuss film

production

Analyze elements

that are unique to

film as an audio-

visual production

Discuss various

stages in the

development of film

production

Explain the

development of film

Illustrate the stages

in the development

of film production.

Appraise the

development of the

movie projector.

Evaluate the

contributions of the

various pioneers in

film industry in

Nigeria

Demonstrate how

film production is

is different and

similar to other

type of aaudio-

visual productions

such as TV, Video

Explain how the

various

formats work.

Interactive

Board

Books

Internet

Film

screening

Quizzes

321

production in

Nigeria

Identify the

pioneers of film

industry in Nigeria

and their

contributions

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 2.0 Know the various equipment used in film production and how to operate them

3-6 2.1 Identify equipment used in

various stages of film production

2.2 Explain the types,

advantages and

disadvantages of these equipment

2.3 Explain the techniques and

methods needed to operate and

use these equipment

Discuss the importance

and uses of equipment

used in film production

Discuss the features and

uses of the various

demonstrate the

uses and

operation of the

various

equipment

identified in 2.1

Guide students to

use and operate

the various

equipment

identified in 2.1

Film camera,

Tripods, Lights,

Microphone

Practice the use

operation of

film equipment

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 3.0 Know the various personell involved in film production and their roles and functions

7-8 3.1 Identify the various

personell invloved in a

typical film production

3.2 Explain the roles and

functions of each these

personell

Explain the functions of

personell involved in film

production

Assess the

function of the

personell

involved in film

production

Undertake role

Guide students to

evaluate and

appreciate how

each individual

invloved in film

production

Books

Internet

List/Charts of

film crew and

cast showing

relationship

322

3.4 Discuss the relationship

between these personell in

film production

assignment contribute to the

final outcome of

the production

Guide students to

function in any of

these roles

and duties

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 4.0 Understand the basic elements in scripting.

6-8

4.1 Define scriptwriting

Explain the importance of scripts

in film production

Identify diferrent types of film

scripts

Explain the stages in scriptwriting

Disuss the elements and structure

of a typical film script.

Explain synopsis,

outline and

research.

Discuss treatment.

Discuss how to

generate ideas.

Discuss the

different stages in

scripwriting.

Demonstrate

ability to

generate ideas

and write

different type

of scripts

Discuss various

aspects of

scripting.

Guide students to

generate ideas and

write scripts

Sample script

Textbooks

Scripting

pitching

Analyse/

critique a

sample script

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 5.0 Understand the basic elements in producing.

9-10 5.1 Identify stages of

production.

5.2 Explain the activities (such as

budgetting, recce e.t.c) involved

in each stage of production.

Discuss the different

stages of production.

Discuss techniques and

methods used to

generate ideas for script

Illustrate the

various stages of

production

Develop ideas

for production.

Discuss various

aspects of

production.

Illustrate how ideas

can be generated.

Interactive

writing Board,

Students are

supervised to

constitute

Quizzes

323

5.3 Explain how to generate

ideas for script devlopment

development such as

brainstorming

Analyze production

stages.

resources

through role

playng

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 6.0: Understand the basic elements in directing

11 6.1 Explain the importance of

directing and the role of film

director in film production.

6.2 Identify the qualities of a

good director.

6.3 Identify directing

terminologies used in film

production

Discuss the roles of a

director.

Discuss the

qualities of a good

director as a

planner, creative

artist and planner

Interpret the

roles of a

director.

Apply the

qualities of a

good director in

a production..

Explain the

director‟s role.

Analyze these roles

and required

qualities.

Interactive

writing Board

and students

Sample script

with

director‟s

notes.

Quizzes

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: 7.0: Understand the basics of non-linear editing

12-13 7.1 Define Editing

7.2 State the types of editing.

7.3 State principles of editing

7.4 List the importance of

editing.

7.5 Describe the processes

involved in editing

7.5 State the tools of editing

7.3 Explain the functions and

Outline the features of

Different types of

editing.

Discuss the advantages

and disadvantages of

types of editing

Explain how to use the

various editing tools

Demonstrate

proficiency in

the use of

various editing

tools

Guide students to

use editing tools

Computer

Editing Suite

Practical

exercise

Edit short

clips

324

use of these tools

325

Department/Programme:

Mass communication

Course Code: 418 Contact Hours/credit unit: 4

Subject/Course:

Newspaper Production

Theoretical: hours/week 2

Year: HND2

Semester: 1st

Pre-requisite: Practical: hours/week 2

Goal: This course is designed to give the student exposure to the advanced stages of newspaper design, layout, typography and

production.

General objectives

On completion of this course the student should:

1. Understand major designs and make-up of a newspaper.

2. Know the various parts of a newspaper.

3. Know the major types of newspapers.

4. Know the evolution of the various types of newspaper.

5. Understand newspaper process using the computer.

Course: Course

Code:

Contact Hours:

Newspaper

Production

MAC 418 Theoretical: hours/week 2

Year: 2

Semester: 1

Pre-

requisite:

Practical: hours/week 2

Theoretical Content Practical Content

General Objective 1: Understand major designs and make-up of a newspaper

Week/

s

Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher‟s

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/practic

al)

Specific

Learning

Outcomes

Teacher‟s

activities

Evaluation

Design a newspaper

1.1 Explain the two major

newspaper formats,

viz, the Tabloid and

the broadsheet (or

Standard or Blanket)

Perform the

activities stated

in specific

learning

outcome.

Illustrate

Various types of

newspapers make-

up

Newspaper pages

computer

State various

newspaper types

List make-up

types

Guide and

supervise students

to make up

newspaper pages

Practical

Page make

up

Grade the

make up

326

Formats.

1.2 State the basic

characteristics of the

Tabloid.

1.3 State the basic

characteristics of the

Broadsheet

1.4 Explain the vertical,

horizontal and modern

newspapers.

1.5 List the advantaged

and disadvantages of

the vertical make-up.

1.6 List the advantages

and disadvantages of

the horizontal make-

up.

1.7 List the advantaged

and disadvantages of

the modern make-up

1.8 Explain the various

newspaper types.

1.9 State characteristics of

major newspaper types

1.10 Explain various

newspaper make-ups.

1.11 Explain history of

newspaper types.

activities like

make-ups

General Objective 2: Know the various parts of a newspaper

Parts

2.1 Discuss the

importance of the front

and back pages of a

newspaper

2.2 Discuss advertisement

and front pages of

Carry out the

activities stated

in learning

outcomes

As in 1 above List various parts

of a newspaper

Identify wrap

around

Guide and

supervise students

to list newspaper

parts and identify

wrap arounds

Quiz on parts

of

newspapers

327

newspapers

2.3 Discuss wrap around

and front and back pages

of newspaper

2.4 List the major parts of

a newspaper, e.g. the flag

(logo), right and left ear

imprint, editing page,

action line, column,

floating logo, etc.

2.4 Explain the

importance of front and

back pages of newspapers.

2.5 Explain the

phenomenon of wrap

around

2.6 State major parts of a

newspaper

General Objective 3: Know the major types of newspapers

Types

3.1 Discuss the following

types of newspapers:

Period

-the afternoon newspaper

-the morning newspaper

Location

-the urban newspaper

-the rural newspaper

-the specialized

newspaper

3.2 Explain the various

types of newspapers

List the various

types of

newspaper

Explain the

various types of

newspapers

State the various

types of

newspapers

Lead the students

to identify the

various types of

newspapers

Quiz on

identification

of newspaper

types

General Objective 4: Know the evolution of the various types of newspaper

328

4.1 Discuss the evolution

of types of newspapers

4.2 Explain the

circumstances that gave

rise to the newspaper

types

4.3 Examine the

characteristics of the

newspaper types

4.4 State the areas of

similarities in the

newspaper types

4.5 State area of

differences in the

newspaper types

Perform the

activities stated

in the specific

outcomes

Types of newspapers State evolution

of newspaper

types

Guide students to

identify the

various types of

newspapers

General Objective 5: Understand newspaper process using the computer.

Techniques

5.1 Gather and write

news using copy

format

5.2 Edit the news for

accuracy,

coherence,

conciseness,

balance, and

simplicity.

5.3 Prepare dummy.

5.4 Plan newspaper

pages using the

computer

5.5 Produce a

newspaper

Explain the

process of

newspaper

production

using a

computer

Dummy sheets

computer with

appropriate software

State the

newspaper

production

process

Guide and

supervise students

to produce a

newspaper

Assess and

grade the

newspaper

329

Programme: Higher National Diploma in

Mass Communication

Course Code:

MAC 419

Contact Hours/Credit Unit: 3

Subject Course: Book Publishing Theoretical Content: Hours/Week 2

Year: HND Semester: Pre-Requisite: Practical: Hours/Week 1

GOAL: This course is designed to train the student acquire the skills needed for publishing books and delivering them to readers

General Objectives:

On completion of this course, the student should:

1.0 Understand the nature of book publishing

2.0 Know how book publishing companies operate

3.0 Understand the book publishing process

4.0 Understand the anatomy of a book

5.0 Know the classification of books

6.0 Know how to assess a manuscript

7.0 Know how to edit manuscript

8.0 Know how to produce a book

9.0 Know how to promote and market a book

10.0 Understand the legal aspects of book publishing

11.0 Understand the principles of electronics (E-book) publishing

12.0 Publish a booklet

Course: Book Publishing Course Code: MAC Contact Hours 2

Year Semester Theoretical: Hours/Week 1

Pre-Requisite: Practical: Hours/Week 1

330

Theoretical Content Practical Content

General Objectives 1.0: Understand the nature of book Publishing

Week

1

Specific Learning Outcomes Teacher‟s activities Specific Learning

Outcomes

Teacher‟s

activities

Resources Evaluation

1.1 Define book publishing

1.2 Examine book publishing

as mass communication

1.3 Outline the role of book

publishing in the

development of the press

1.4 Examine the role of book

publishing in natural

development

Define book

publishing

Explain book

publishing as mass

communication

Identify the role of

book publishing in

personal and natural

development

No practical NA Textbooks

Journals

Internet

Quiz

2 General Objectives 2.0: Know how book publishing companies operate

2.1 Explain the organisational

structure for a book

publishing company.

2.2 Identify the key personal

in a book publishing

company

2.3 Explain the roles of the

key personal in a book

publishing company.

2.4 Identify the duties of the

personnel

2.5 Prepare an organisation of

a book publishing

company

Explain

organizational

structure

Identify key

personnel involved

Explain the roles of

the key personnel

Prepare an

organogram of a

book publishing

company

Identify key

personnel in the

organogram

Identify the

Guide student to

perform the

practical

learning

outcome stated

Textbooks

Journals

Internet

Sample organogram of

a book publishing

company

Give

assignment

on preparing

organogram

Grade and

assess

outcome in

class

331

Draw an organogram

of a book publishing

company

relationship

between the

various

departments

3 General Objectives 3.0: Understand the book publishing process

3.1 Explain the book

publishing process.

3.2 Identify the key personnel

involved in the process.

3.3 Explain the roles of the

author, the agent,

acquisition for first reader

staff editor copy

typesetter/design, proof

reader

3.4 Explain the printing,

binding and making

functions

3.5 Identify the distributor,

retailer and readers,

Explain the book

publishing process

Identify the roles of

the author and editors

etc.

Explain printing and

binding functions

Identify marketing

distribution functions

Textbooks

Journals

Internet

Quiz

4 General Objectives 4.0: Understand the anatomy of a book

4.1 Differentiate between the

literacy and material parts

of a book.

4.2 Identify the component of

litecy part of a book from

Explain the litecy of

material part of a

book

Module does not

require practical

N A Textbooks

Journals

Internet

Quiz

332

first cover to back

cover/blurb.

4.3 Identify the components

or elements of material

part of a book

Identify the element

of each part

5 General Objectives 5.0: Know the classification of books

5.1 Identify the different types

of books.

5.2 Differentiate between

classification of books by

their functions and by

authorship

5.3 Explain trade books,

textbooks, reference

books, religions books

and professional books.

5.4 Explain autobiography,

biography, book of

reading, anthology, and

memories

Identify the different

type of books

Classify books by

functions and by

authorship

Explain the different

types of books in

each classification

Reorganise

different types of

book

List books in each

classification

Lead the student

to accomplish

the tasks in the

stated practical

performance

objectives

Textbooks

Journals

Internet

Give

assignment

Grade and

discuss the

outcome in

class

6 General Objectives 6.0: Know how to assess a manuscript

6.1 Explain how to source a

manuscript.

6.2 Explain commissioned

script

6.3 Define unsolicited script

6.4 Identify criteria for

assessing a script

Explain how to

source manuscript

Define commissioned

script

Define unsolicited

Assess a book for

publication

Guide student in

assessing books

Textbooks

Journals

Internet

Give

assignment

and grade

333

script

Explain criteria for

assessing a script

General Objectives 8.0: Know how to produce a book

8.1 Explain typesetting

8.2 Define formatting and

design

8.3 Explain activities

involved in printing

8.4 Explain the process of

creating a corm

8.5 Discuss binding and

packaging

Explain typesetting

Define formatting

Explain activities

involved in printing

Explain how a corm

is created

Explain binding and

packaging

Visit a printing

press

Observe the

operation of the

press

Create a corm for

a book

Participate in

binding and

packaging

Guide students

to perform the

activities listed

in the practical

performance

objectives

Textbooks

Journals

Internet

Give and

mark

assignment

10-12 General Objectives 9.0: Know how to promote and market a book

9.1 Define sales promotion

9.2 Define advertising

9.3 Explain promotional and

advertising gimmicks

Define sales

promotion

Carry out book

promotion and

Textbooks

Journals

Quiz

334

such as book readings,

book launchings, reviews,

exhibitions, press

relations, etc

9.4 Explain book distribution

channel, such as schools,

book clubs, subscription,

libraries etc.

Define advertising

Explain promotional

and market gimmicks

used in marketing

book , e .g book

readings, launchings,

reviews etc

making activities Internet

12 General Objectives 10.0: Understand the legal aspects of book publishing

1.0.1 Examine the

relationship between

book publishing and

the law

1.0.2 Define book

publishing agreement

between an author and

the publisher

1.0.3 Explain legal

provisions such as

copyright libel,

privacy, etc.

Examine the

relationship between

book publishing and

the law

Define book

publishing agreement

between an author

and the publisher

Explain legal

provisions such as

copyright libel,

privacy, etc.

NA This module

does not require

practical

Textbooks

Journals

Internet

Quiz

13 General Objectives 11.0:Understand the principles of electronic (E-book) publishing

11.1 Define E-Publishing

11.2 Explain the process of

Online Publishing

11.3 Explain the legal

implications of online

publishing

Define E-Publishing

Explain the process

of Online Publishing

Explain the legal

aspects of online

Publish booklets

online

Guide students

to publish books

online

Textbooks

Journals

Internet

Give

assignments

335

publishing

Department/Programme:

Mass communication

Course Code: 418 Contact Hours/credit unit: 4

Subject/Course:

Newspaper Production

Theoretical: hours/week 2

Year: HND2

Semester: 1st

Pre-requisite: Practical: hours/week 2

Goal: This course is designed to give the student exposure to the advanced stages of newspaper design, layout, typography and

production.

General objectives

On completion of this course the student should:

6. Understand major designs and make-up of a newspaper.

7. Know the various parts of a newspaper.

8. Know the major types of newspapers.

9. Know the evolution of the various types of newspaper.

10. Understand newspaper process using the computer.

Course: Course

Code:

Contact Hours:

Newspaper

Production

MAC 418 Theoretical: hours/week 2

Year: 2

Semester: 1

Pre-

requisite:

Practical: hours/week 2

Theoretical Content Practical Content

General Objective 1: Understand major designs and make-up of a newspaper

Week/

s

Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher‟s

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/practic

al)

Specific

Learning

Outcomes

Teacher‟s

activities

Evaluation

Design a newspaper Perform the Various types of State various Guide and Practical

336

1.12 Explain the two

major newspaper

formats, viz, the

Tabloid and the

broadsheet (or

Standard or Blanket)

Formats.

1.13 State the basic

characteristics of the

Tabloid.

1.14 State the basic

characteristics of the

Broadsheet

1.15 Explain the

vertical, horizontal

and modern

newspapers.

1.16 List the

advantaged and

disadvantages of the

vertical make-up.

1.17 List the advantages

and disadvantages of

the horizontal make-

up.

1.18 List the

advantaged and

disadvantages of the

modern make-up

1.19 Explain the

various newspaper

types.

1.20 State

characteristics of

major newspaper types

1.21 Explain various

activities stated

in specific

learning

outcome. 1.12-

1.13

newspapers make-

up

Newspaper pages

computer

newspaper types

List make-up

types

Illustrate

activities like

make-ups.

supervise students

to make up

newspaper pages

Page make

up

Grade the

make up

337

newspaper make-ups.

1.22 Explain history of

newspaper types.

General Objective 2: Know the various parts of a newspaper

Parts

2.1 Discuss the

importance of the front

and back pages of a

newspaper

2.2 Discuss advertisement

and front pages of

newspapers

2.3 Discuss wrap around

and front and back pages

of newspaper

2.4 List the major parts of

a newspaper, e.g. the flag

(logo), right and left ear

imprint, editing page,

action line, column,

floating logo, etc.

2.4 Explain the

importance of front and

back pages of newspapers.

2.5 Explain the

phenomenon of wrap

around

2.6 State major parts of a

newspaper

Carry out the

activities stated

in learning

outcomes

2.1 TO 2.5

As in 1 above List various parts

of a newspaper

Identify wrap

around

Guide and

supervise students

to list newspaper

parts and identify

wrap arounds

Quiz on parts

of

newspapers

General Objective 3: Know the major types of newspapers

Types

3.1 Discuss the following

types of newspapers:

List the various

types of

newspaper

State the various

types of

newspapers

Lead the students

to identify the

various types of

Quiz on

identification

of newspaper

338

Period

-the afternoon newspaper

-the morning newspaper

Location

-the urban newspaper

-the rural newspaper

-the specialized

newspaper

3.2 Explain the various

types of newspapers

Explain the

various types of

newspapers

newspapers types

General Objective 4: Know the evolution of the various types of newspaper

4.1 Discuss the evolution

of types of newspapers

4.2 Explain the

circumstances that gave

rise to the newspaper

types

4.3 Examine the

characteristics of the

newspaper types

4.4 State the areas of

similarities in the

newspaper types

4.5 State area of

differences in the

newspaper types

Perform the

activities stated

in the specific

outcomes

Types of newspapers State evolution

of newspaper

types

Guide students to

identify the

various types of

newspapers

General Objective 5: Understand newspaper process using the computer.

Techniques

10.1 Gather and

write news using

copy format

10.2 Edit the

news for accuracy,

coherence,

conciseness,

Explain the

process of

newspaper

production

using a

computer

Dummy sheets

computer with

appropriate software

State the

newspaper

production

process

Guide and

supervise students

to produce a

newspaper

Assess and

grade the

newspaper

339

balance, and

simplicity.

10.3 Prepare

dummy.

10.4 Plan

newspaper pages

using the computer

10.5 Produce a

newspaper

Course: Insurance/Title

COMMUNICATION AND

NATIONAL DEVELOPMENT

Course code:

MAC422

Contact Hours/credit unit: 3/2

Theoretical: hours/week

Year: 2

Semester: 2nd

Pre-requisite Practical: hours/week

Theoretical Content Practical Content

General Objectives 1: Know the meaning of National Development

Wee

k

Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher‟s

activities

Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher‟s

activities

Resources

(Theoretical/prac

tical)

Evaluation

National Development

1.1 Define national

development

1.2 Distinguish between

a developed and a

developing nation

1.3 Explain the major

characteristics of a

less developed

nation and a

developing nation

1.4 Know the meaning

of national

Define and

distinguish

between develop

and developing

nations

Books

internet

Assignment

340

development

General Objectives 2: Understand the concept of development communication

Development

Communication

2.1 Define development

communication

2.2 Distinguish between

development

communication and

other forms of

communication, e.g.,

interpersonal,

international and

intercultural

2.3 Understand the

concept of development

The student

should know what

development

communication is

and the different

forms

communication

General Objectives 3: Understand the evolution of development communication

Evolution of

Development

Communication

3.1 Trace the historical

foundation of

development

communication

3.2 Analyse the

rationale of

development

communication.

3.3 Understand the

evolution o

development

communication.

Trace the

historical

development and

rationale of

development

communication

General Objectives 4: Know the functions of development communication

Functions of

Development

List functions of

development

341

communication

4.1 List the functions of

development

communication viz.

a. loudspeaker

b. reformer

c. organizer

d. equalizer

e enricher

f. accelerator

g. legitimizer

h. researcher

i. mobiliser

j. informant

k. educator

l. advocator

4.2 Explain the

functions listed in 4.1

above

4.3 Appraise the

functions listed 4.1

above

4.4 Know the functions

of development

communication.

communication.

e.g. loudspeaker,

reformer List the

advantaged and

disadvantages of

the vertical make-

up.

List the

advantages and

disadvantages of

the horizontal

make-up.List the

advantaged and

disadvantages of

the modern make-

up

Explain the

various

newspaper types.

State

characteristics of

major newspaper

types

Explain various

newspaper make-

ups.

General Objectives 5: Know the basic theories of development communication

Theories of

Development

Communication

5.1 Explain the

normative of the press,

viz, authority,

liberation, social

responsibility,

Explain the

theories and their

applications

Explain the

normative of the

press, viz,

authority,

liberation, social

Practical not

required

342

communist.

5.2 Explain the

instructional design

strategies.

5.3 Explain the theories

of acceptance, rejection,

avoidance and

participation

5.4 Analyse social

making strategy.

5.5 Know the basic

theory of development

communication

responsibility,

communist.

5.2 Explain the

instructional

design strategies.

5.3 Explain the

theories of

acceptance,

rejection,

avoidance and

participation

General Objectives 6: Know how to apply communications techniques for development

Application of

Techniques

6.1 Determine when and

how to use interviews,

talk shows, drama, short

stories, poetry, posters,

and magazine

programmes in

development

communication.

6.2 Use the techniques

listed in 6.1 above

6.3 study how to apply

communication

techniques for

development

6.4 list the problem of

development

communication

Explain how the

techniques will be

used for national

development

With relevant

examples explain

the problem of

development

communication

Explain the

normative of the

press, viz,

authority,

liberation, social

responsibility,

communist.

.

Explain the

theories of

acceptance,

343

rejection,

avoidance and

participation

Department/ Programme: HIGHER

NATIONAL DIPLOMA IN MASS

COMMUNICATION

Course Code:

MAC 423

Contact Hours: 3

Subject/Course: PUBLIC RELATIONS

CASE STUDIES

DURATION: 3

HOURS/WEEK

SCHEDULE:

SEMESTER

Theoretical: hours 2

Year: HND2Semester: 2

nd Pre-requisite: PRCOPY&

Media

Practical: 1 hour /week

GOAL: This course is designed to sharpen the ability of the students in assessing public relations problems and proffering solutions

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of this course the student should:

1.0 Understand public relations problems in organizations

General Objectives 7: Understand the problems of development communication

Problems

7.1 Discuss the major

obstacles to

development

communication, such as

poverty, transportation,

conceptualization,

training, funds,

ignorance, illiteracy, etc.

List the major

obstacles to

development

communication,

such as poverty,

transportation,

conceptualization,

training, funds,

ignorance,

illiteracy, etc

Explain the theories

of acceptance,

rejection, avoidance

and participation

344

2.0 Understand public relations case studies from various organizations

3.0 Know how to analyse case studies

4.0 Know the public relations operational practices in specific establishments

5.0 Know how to evaluate public relations reports

6.0 Know how to write public relations case reports

Course: : PUBLIC RELATIONS

CASE STUDIES

Course Code: MAC 423 Contact Hours

3:

Course Specification: Theoretical hours/week

2

Year:

HNDII

Pre-requisite: - PRCOPY & Media Practical: 1 hour /week

SEMESTER: 2ND

Theoretical Content Practical

Content

General Objectives: 1.0 Understand public relations problems in organizations

Week Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Specific Learning

Outcome

Teacher's

activities

Resources &

(Theoretical/Pra

ctical)

Evaluation

2 Problems

1.1 identify public

relations policies and

practices in

organizations.

1.2 Identify the sources of

public relations

problems in

organizations

1.3 Analyse possible

effects of the

problems in 1.2 above

on the organizations.

1.4 Explain public

relations policies and

Carryout the

activities stated

in the specific

learning

outcomes. 1.1-

1.6

State public relations

policies and practices

list sources of public

relations problems

State the effects of the

problems on

organizations

Guide the

students to

analyse possible

effects of

specific

relations

problems

Books

Journals

Quiz on

learning

outcomes

345

practices in

organizations

1.5 List sources of public

relations problems in

organizations

1.6 Explain effects of

problems in 1.2.

General Objectives: 2.0 Understand public relations case studies from various organizations perspectives

2 Perspectives

2.1 State public relations

case studies

2.2 Analyse the case

studies

2.3 Identify specific

problems in public

relations case studies.

2.4 Prepare solutions to

the case studies

2.5 Discuss the various

public relations case

studies

2.6 List the problems in

each case

2.7 Explain solutions to

the problems.

Performa all

activities in the

specific

learning

objectives

State the public

relations cases

List the

solutions to the

stated public

cases

Identify issues in the

specific cases

Guide students

to solve cases

Typed public

relations cases

Quiz on

learning

outcome

grading of quiz.

General Objectives: 3.0 Know how to analyse case studies

3 Analysis

3.1 Present case studies

emanating from Nigeria

e.g NNPC, Nigeria Police

etc various government –

federal, state.

3.2 List areas for public

relations case studies

Carry out stated

activities in

specific

learning

objectives 3.1,

3.2, and 3.3.

Guide students

to analyse the

cases

Copies of public

relations cases.

Journals

Specialized

publications.

346

3.3 Analyse public

relations cases drawn

from the locality

including the institutions

3.4 Present public

relations cases involving

some public institutions in

Nigeria.

3.5 Present public

relations cases from the

locality.

3.4 Analyse 3.5 above,

General Objectives: 4.0 Know the public relations operational practices in specific establishments

Operational practices

4.1 Identify a specific

public relations problem

in the institutions or

locality

4.2 Draw up a public

relations programme to

solve the problem in 4.1

above.

4.3 Supervise the

execution of the

programme in 4.2 above.

4.4 Evaluate the success

of the execution.

4.5 List specific public

relations problems in the

institutions or locality

4.6 Draw up a public

relations programme to

solve the problem

4.7 Supervise the

execution of 4.2

4.8 Evaluate success of

Perform

activities

specified in

specific

learning

objectives

State public

relations

problems

State plans to

solve them.

Evaluate the

outcome

Guide students

to draw up and

execute the

programs

Grade the

programmes

347

4.3

General Objectives: 5.0 Understand how to evaluate public relations reports

3 Evaluation

5.1 Define public

relations reports.

5.2 State the components

of public relations reports.

5.3 Identify elements of a

good public relations

report.

5.4 Identify elements of a

bad public relations

report.

5.5 List the components

of public relations reports.

5.6 State elements of a

good public relations

reports.

5.7 State elements of a

bad public relations

reports.

Carryout

activities stated

in specific

learning

objectives 5.1-

5.7

Typed public relations

reports

State meaning

of public

relations report

List

characteristics

of a good and

bad public

relations report.

Quiz on

components of

good and bad

public relations

reports

General Objectives: 6.0 Know how to write public relations case reports

2 Writing

6.1 Write group and

individual public relations

report.

6.2 Present group and

individual reports.

6.3 Evaluate group and

individual reports in 5.1

above.

6.4 Write group

6.5 Write individual

reports

Explain

processes

involve in

writing group

and individual

public relations

report.

.

Evaluate group

and individual

reports writing

in 5.1 above.

Pen and paper Grade group

and individual

reports

348

Department/Programme:

Mass Communication.

Subject/Course:

Advanced

Radio/Television/

Production

COURSE

CODE

Mac 410

CONTACT HOURS:

Theoretical hours/week

Practical: hours/week

Year: HND II semester: 2 Pre-requisite: Mac 410 Radio/ TV Production Techniques

GOAL: This course is designed to expose the student to advanced techniques of Radio, Television and digital media Production.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES: On completion of the Course, the student should:

1.0 Know how to produce and direct programmes within the studio setting

2.0 Know how to produce outside Broadcast

3.0 Know how to produce programmes for online platforms

4.0 Know how to produce, direct and package video musicals/ Audio CD

5.0 Know how to produce and direct Broadcast drama

6.6 Present individual

reports.

6.7 Present individual

reports

6.8 Evaluate group reports

6.9 evaluate individual

reports

349

6.0 Know how to produce a documentary

350

COURSE: Radio/ TV

Production Technique

COURSE CODE

MAC 410

CONTACT HOURS: 4 CREDIT UNITS: 3

Theoretical hours/week 1

Practical: hours/week 3

Year: HND2 semester: 2 Pre-requisite: Mac 410

Theoretical Content: Practical Content

General Objective: Know how to produce and direct Radio & TV studio programmes

Week: Teacher‟s activities

Resources Specific

Learning

Outcomes

Resources

Specific

learning

outcomes

Teacher‟s activities Evaluation

1 – 2 1.1 Define Producer,

Production & Director.

1.2 Design a programme

topic- such as feature,

Talk-show, children‟s

show etc.

1.3 Discuss reasons to

have a crew and assign

functions.

1.4 Explain the need to

choose a balanced cast

1.5 Explain ned for dry-run

1.6 Distinguish between

recorded and live

production.

Guide students to

perform the

activities stated in

the specific

learning outcomes

1.1-16

Broadcast

equipment in

the

studio/control

rooms; cast &

crew

demonstrate

steps needed

for studio

production

Guide and supervise

students

Watch and critique

recorded show

together. Grade

General Objective 2: Know how to produce Outside Broadcast

2-3 2.1 Plan the broadcast for Quiz/ grade

351

activities like sports,

soccer, festivals,

ceremonies etc.

2. 2 Explain the need to

research on topic of choice.

2.3 Explain need for on-

location reconnaissance

(Recee) or pre-visit.

2.4 Identify equipment in

OB Van and base control

room

2.5 Brief the Production

Crew

2.6 Explain need to liaise

with base

Guide students to

perform the

activities stated in

the specific

learning outcomes

Recording

base or

mobile studio

video sender,

or available

wireless for

remote

broadcast;

Base Control

Rm (CTR)

demonstrate

steps needed

for studio

broadcast

4-5 General Objective 3: Know how to produce programmes for online platforms

Digital Broadcast

3.1 Explain online

platforms.

3.2 Explain the

transmission process

3.3 Explain various

platforms used by Radio

and TV stations to

distribute programmes(e.g.

webcasting and podcasting)

3.4 Explain the relationship

between base control room,

transmitter and

transmission process.

3.5 Demonstrate actual

remote transmission

Perform the

activities leading to

digital production

of podcasts and

webcasts.

Demonstrate

podcast as

webcasting with

smart phones or

other mobile

devices

Internet demonstrate

steps needed

for studio

broadcast/po

dcast

Guide and supervise

operations

Quiz

6-9

General Objective 4: Know how to produce, broadcast and package video musicals/ Audio CD

352

MUSICALS/ AUDIO CD

4.1 Explain studio layout

4.2 Explain storyline,

music text, cutting bits/

recording audio CD

4.3 Explain the need to

rehearse music movement

4.4 Demonstrate

synchronization with

choreography

4.5 Demonstrate sound

mixing/recording

techniques using the

computer

4.6 Explain recording

stages

Explain to students

as in 4.1 to 4.6 to

perform activities

stated

DVD, CD Guide

students to

perform

activities

stated

demonstrate steps

needed for musical

production

Quiz, view and

critique recorded

programme

General Objective 5: know how to produce & direct broadcast drama

10-12 5.1 Discuss the principles

of drama

5.2 script

Explain the

principles of drama

5.2 script

Illustrate the

principles

governing

drama

Demonstrate

the principles

of drama

script

drama

script

Discuss the

principles of drama

5.2 script

5.3 cast for roles

5.4 use of music in

drama/foley effects

5.5 use of production

technique

5.3 cast for roles

5.4 use of music in

drama/foley effects

5.5 use of

production

technique

cast for roles

practice use

of music in

drama/foley

effects

use of

production

technique

cast for roles

use of music

in

drama/foley

effects

use of

production

technique

Radio, cassette cast for roles

use of music in

drama/foley effects

use of production

technique

General Objectives 6.

353

13-14 6.0 collect materials for

doc

collect materials for

doc

6.1 reconstruct some

scenes

6.2 explain voice over

narration

6.3 shooting

process/recording

reconstruct some

scenes

explain voice over

narration

shooting

process/recording

reconstruct

some scenes

listen to voice

over narration

illustrate

shooting

process/record

ing

reconstruct

some scenes

listen to

voice over

narration

illustrate

shooting

process/recor

ding

Video camera explain voice over

narration

explain shooting

process/recording

General Objectives 7: know how to produce and package programme of choice

15 GROUP PRACTICAL PROJECT

7.1 Divide class into

manageable groups

supervise student‟s

production

Evaluation

7.2 allow groups to choose

and plan their projects

7.3 set a dateline for final

submission

7.4 view and critique

together recommend

correction

7.5 arrange for

public/campus

viewing/campus

transmission

354

LABORATORIES/STUDIOS REQUIRED FOR NATIONAL DIPLOMA AND HIGHER

NATIONAL DIPLOMA (ND)/HND IN MASS COMMUNICATION

PROGRAMME: ND/HND

LABORATORIES:

1. News Writing and Editing

2. Public Relations/Advertising/Research Resources Center

STUDIOS:

1. Radio/Sound Recording

2. Television

3. Photography

EQUIPMENT FOR THE STUDIOS

RADIO/SOUND RECORDING SDUDIO

S/NO DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

REQUIERD

1. Omni-Directional Microphones………………………………………………………………………….5

2. UNI-Directional Microphones ……………………………………………………………………………….5

355

3. BI

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

……….5

4. Condenser

………………………………………………………………………………………………2

5. Condenser dynamic microphone Including one Boom …………………………………………2

6. Professional Audio – Mixer (16 channel) ………………………………………………………………1

7. Audio Head Phone …………………………………………………………………………………………

6

8. Loud Speaker (studio one and two)…………………………………………………………………….4

9. Radio receiver

………………………………………………………………………………………………..1

10. Satellite Radio Receiver

………………………………………………………………………………………1

11. Midgets (digital)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………6

12. Computer Set with Appropriate Software……………………………………………………………...2

13. MIC Stand

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………2

NOTE:

The Radio Studio and Control Room must be professionally illuminated, acoustically treated, air conditioned and

large enough to accommodate not less than 2O Students at a time. The control Room should be spacious enough to

take 10 people at a time.

NB: Departments are encouraged to set up their own radio stations.

356

TELEVISION STUDIO

1. Omni Directional Microphones …………………………………………..5

2. Uni-directional Microphone…..…………………………………………….5

3. Bi-directional Microphone… ………………………………………………..5

4. Lavaliere/ Lapel Microphone ………………………………………………..5

5. CONDENSER microphone…………………………………………………. 1

6. Table Microphone Stand ……………………………………………………..2

7. Fish pole ………………………………………………………………………1

8. Floor Microphone stand……………………………………….………………2

9. Boom Microphone stand……………………………………….……………...1

10. Audio CD player (Multifunctional)……………………………………………2

11. DVD player (Professional) ………………………………………….…………2

12. Laptop Computer ……………………………………………………………...4

13. Desktop COMPUTER ……………………..….………………………………..3

14. Headphones (TV) ……………………………………………………………….6

15. Professional HDV Camera with tape or with Memory card (Tapeless) …….….4

16. Camera Tripod with ONE dolly …………………………………………………3

17. Cyclorama

18. Monitor ………………………………………………………..…………………6

19. Basic studio LIGHTS: (a) Key lights……………………………………………..2

(b) Fill Lights (with barn doors) …………………………………………………2

(c) Back light (with barn doors) ………………………………………………….2

357

(d) Moveable light with barn doors………………………………………………3

20. Grid Light with Dimmer……………………………………………………............a set

21. Stabilizers…………………………………………………………………….depend on the number of equipment available

22. Industrial UPS ……………………………………………………………......................1

23. Edit Suite Video Editing with appropriate software (e.g. Adobe Premiere Pro & Adobe Audition for sound) +

24. External Hard drive .………(ITB)..……………………………………………………….1

25. Digital Vision mixer ………………………………………………………………………1

26. Digital Audio Console (16 channel)……………………………………………………….1

27. Camera Stand (Tripod) ……………………………………………………………………1

28. Camera Dolly Tripod ………………………………………………………………………2

29. Box of Light ………………………………………………………………………………..3

30. Color gels (Red, Blue, yellow & Sky blue)

N/B. A Television Studio should be large enough to allow for free camera movement and accommodate not less than 20 students

at a time; the Control Room not less than 10 students at time. The studio must have double sound proof doors, professionally

illuminated, acoustically treated, properly air-conditioned with a good professional cyclorama.

358

PHOTOGRAPHY STUDIO

S/NO DESCRIPTION QUANTITY REQUIERD

1. DSLR (Digital Single Lens Reflex Cameras)…………………………………………10

2. Lences:24mm-50mm zoom……………………………………………………………………….5

3. Lenses: 24 mm-50mm zoom……………………………………………………………………….2

4. Lenses:

50mm…………………………………………………………………………………………….2

5. Light: i. Bounce

flash………………………………………………………………………………..2

Ii. Studio

Lamps………………………………………………………………………………2

Iii. Backdrop

Canvas……………………………………………………………………….3

6. Tripod

……………………………………………………………………………………………………2

7. Pairs of

scissors…………………………………………………………………………….…………5

8. Electric Generating Plants(optional)………………………………………………………..1

9. Pick-up van for field use(optional)……………………………………………………………1

LENSES

10. 24mm-50mm Zoom…………………………………………………………………………………5

LIGHT

359

11. Bounce

Flash……………………………………………………………………………………………2

12. Studio

Lamps…………………………………………………………………….……………………..2

13. Backup

Canvas……………………………………………………………………………………..……3

14. Computers with software…………………………………………………………………….…….5

15.

Reflectors/umbrellas………………………………………………………………………………….2

16. Scanner (500 PI

ABOVE)…………………………………………………………………….……….2

17. External Hard

Disk(mm/TB)…………………………………………………………………………1

18.

SCISSORS……………………………………………………………………………………………………6

19. Professional Photo Printer

………………………………………………………………………………….……….2

360

EQUIPMENT

NEWSWRITING/EDITING LAB

Horse-shoe shaped table

formation……………………………………………………………………………….1

Office

Chairs……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

……..20

Desktop computers (with appropriate software…………………………………………………………….10

Printers…………………………………………………………………………………………………………

……………….02

361

Cable/Satellite

TV……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

TV

sets………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

……………..2

Internet Access

Scanner…………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………….1

Radio

Sets………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

…………2

Digital Audio

Midget………………………………………………………………………………………………………..20

Daily Newspapers and Magazines

Maps, Globe, Dictionaries, Thesaurus

DVD

Players…………………………………………………………………………………………………………

…………...2

362

PUBLIC RELATIONS/ADVERTISING RESEARCH/RESOURCE CENTER

Desktops (with appropriate

software…………………………………………………………………………….20

Printer…………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………..2

Scanner…………………………………………………………………………………………………………

……………….1

Multimedia

Projector…………………………………………………………………………………………………….2

Projector

stand/Screen………………………………………………………………………………………………….2

DVD

Players/Recorder………………………………………………………………………………………………

……2

Cable/Satellite

TV…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

TV

Set………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

……………..2

Photocopier……………………………………………………………………………………………………

……………….1

Radio Receiver

set……………………………………………………………………………………………………………2

363

Internet

Access…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Laptop………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

……..

Daily Newspapers and Magazines

Journals

Magazines

Tables…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

…….20

Chairs…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

…….20

RESOURCE PERSONS

1. PROF. INNOCENT OKOYE DEPT. OF MASS COMM.

KWARA STATE UNIVERSITY

2. PROF. UMAR PATE DEPT. OF MASS COMM.

UNI MAIDUGURI

3. DR. JOHN O. EDEMODE DEPT. OF MASS COMM.

AUCHI POLY

4. MR. G. O. IBE DEPT. OF MASS COMM.

364

FED POLY OKO

5. DR. J. B. IGE DEPT. OF MASS COMM.

FED POLY OFFA

6. MR. MIKAILU NDALIMAN DEPT. OF MASS COMM.

FED POLY BIDA

7. MR. WALE AJAYI DEPT. OF MASS COMM.

LAGOS STATE POLY, IKORODU

8. MAL. HASSAN HASSAN DEPT. OF MASS COMM.

FED POLY BAUCHI

9. MR. CHARLES ONI DEPT. OF MASS COMM.

YABA TECH

10. MARTHA ONYEBUCHI APCON LAGOS

11. CYRIL OKONKWO NTA LAGOS

12. DR. T. S. EBONG DEPT. OF MASS COMM.

AKWA IBOM STATE POLY, IKOJ OSURUA

13. ARC. T .O. ADEKUNLE Ag DIRECTOR PROGS. NBTE

14. MRS. SARAH GAMI NBTE

15. ANSA O. NDEM NBTE

365

SUPPORT STAFF

16. HASSANA ABDULLAHI NBTE

17. RABI SANI NBTE